Saturn Automobile 2007 Vue User Guide

2007 Saturn VUE Owner Manual M  
OnStar® System  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keep this manual in the vehicle so it will be there  
if it is needed. If the vehicle is sold, leave this  
manual in the vehicle.  
Canadian Owners  
A French language copy of this manual can be  
obtained from your dealer/retailer or from:  
SATURN, the SATURN Emblem, and the  
name VUE are registered trademarks of Saturn  
Corporation. GENERAL MOTORS and GM  
are registered trademarks of General Motors  
Corporation.  
Helm, Incorporated  
P.O. Box 07130  
Detroit, MI 48207  
About Driving Your Vehicle  
This manual includes the latest information at  
the time it was printed. We reserve the right  
to make changes after that time without further  
notice.  
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to  
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss  
of control or an accident. Be sure to read the  
“on-pavement” and “off-road” driving guidelines in  
on page 247.  
This manual describes features that may be  
available in this model, but your vehicle may not  
have all of them. For example, more than one  
entertainment system may be offered or your  
vehicle may have been ordered without a front  
passenger or rear seats.  
Litho in U.S.A.  
Part No. 15860080 B Second Printing  
©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Use This Manual  
{CAUTION:  
Many people read the owner manual from  
beginning to end when they first receive their  
new vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn  
about the features and controls for the vehicle.  
Pictures and words work together in the owner  
manual to explain things.  
These mean there is something that could  
hurt you or other people.  
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.  
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or  
reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.  
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.  
Index  
A good place to quickly locate information about  
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.  
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual  
and the page number where it can be found.  
You will also find a  
circle with a slash  
through it in this book.  
This safety symbol  
means “Do Not,”  
Safety Warnings and Symbols  
“Do Not do this” or “Do  
Not let this happen.”  
There are a number of safety cautions in this  
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to  
tell about things that could hurt you if you were to  
ignore the warning.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Damage Warnings  
Vehicle Symbols  
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:  
The vehicle has components and labels that use  
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown  
along with the text describing the operation or  
information relating to a specific component,  
control, message, gage, or indicator.  
Notice: These mean there is something  
that could damage your vehicle.  
A notice tells about something that can damage  
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be  
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could  
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help  
avoid the damage.  
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a  
component, gage, or indicator, reference the  
following topics:  
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1  
Features and Controls in Section 2  
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3  
Climate Controls in Section 3  
When you read other manuals, you might see  
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors  
or in different words.  
There are also warning labels on the vehicle.  
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.  
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in  
Section 3  
Audio System(s) in Section 3  
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1  
Seats and Restraint Systems  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front Seats  
Manual Seats  
{CAUTION:  
You can lose control of the vehicle if you  
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while  
the vehicle is moving. The sudden  
movement could startle and confuse you,  
or make you push a pedal when you do  
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only  
when the vehicle is not moving.  
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to  
unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it  
and release the bar. Try to move the seat with  
your body to be sure the seat is locked in place.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Seat Height Adjuster  
Power Seat  
If your vehicle has a manual driver seat height  
adjuster, it is located on the outboard side of the  
seat near the front of the seat cushion. To raise the  
seat, move the lever upward repeatedly until the  
seat is at the desired height. To lower the seat,  
move the lever downward repeatedly until the  
seat is at the desired height.  
If the vehicle has a power seat, the control used  
to operate it is located on the outboard side of the  
driver’s seat. To adjust the seat do any of the  
following:  
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding  
the control forward or rearward.  
Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion  
by moving the front of the control up or down.  
Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion  
by moving the rear of the control up or down.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Manual Lumbar  
Heated Seats  
If your vehicle has  
this feature, the knob  
is located on the front  
of the driver seat  
lower cushion on the  
inboard side.  
Your vehicle may  
have heated seats.  
The switches are  
located below the  
climate control system  
and forward of the  
shift lever.  
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to  
increase or decrease the lumbar support.  
Press 1 to warm the seat. Press 2 for a higher  
temperature setting. To turn this feature off, move  
the switch to the center position.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Manual Reclining Seatbacks  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
If the seatback is not locked, it could  
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.  
That could cause injury to the person  
sitting there. Always push and pull on  
the seatback to be sure it is locked.  
You can lose control of the vehicle if you  
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while  
the vehicle is moving. The sudden  
movement could startle and confuse you,  
or make you push a pedal when you do  
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only  
when the vehicle is not moving.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To recline the seatback on the driver’s seat, lift the  
lever on the rear outboard side of the seat and  
move the seatback to the desired position. Then  
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.  
To recline the seatback on the front passenger’s  
seat, lift the lever, located on the outboard side of  
the seat, up fully to disengage the seatback. Then  
move the seatback to the desired position. Release  
the lever to lock the seatback in place.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
Sitting in a reclined position when your  
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.  
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts  
cannot do their job when you are reclined  
like this.  
The shoulder belt cannot do its job  
because it will not be against your body.  
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a  
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck  
or other injuries.  
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a  
crash, the belt could go up over your  
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,  
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause  
serious internal injuries.  
For proper protection when the vehicle is  
in motion, have the seatback upright.  
Then sit well back in the seat and wear  
your safety belt properly.  
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle  
is moving.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pull the head restraint  
up to raise it. To lower  
the head restraint,  
Head Restraints  
press the button,  
located on the top of the  
seatback, and push  
the restraint down.  
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the  
restraint is at the same height as the top of  
the occupant’s head. This position reduces the  
chance of a neck injury in a crash.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Passenger Folding Seatback  
{CAUTION:  
The front passenger’s seatback folds flat.  
Things you put on this seatback can  
strike and injure people in a sudden stop  
or turn, or in a crash. Remove or secure  
all items before driving.  
{CAUTION:  
If you fold the seatback forward to carry  
longer objects, such as skis, be sure any  
such cargo is not near an airbag. In a  
crash, an inflating airbag might force that  
object toward a person. This could cause  
severe injury or even death. Secure  
objects away from the area in which  
an airbag would inflate. For more  
information, see Where Are the Airbags?  
on page 75 and Loading Your Vehicle on  
page 279.  
To fold the seatback, do the following:  
1. Lower the head restraint all the way.  
2. Lift the bar under the front of the seat to  
unlock it. Slide the seat as far back as it  
will go and release the bar. Try to move  
the seat back and forth to make sure  
it is locked into place.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboard  
side of the seat, up fully and fold the seatback  
forward until it disengages.  
4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locks  
in the folded position.  
5. Pull up on the seatback to be sure it is  
locked.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To raise the seatback, do the following:  
Rear Seats  
1. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboard  
side of the seat, up fully and push up on the  
seatback.  
Split Folding Rear Seat  
The rear split bench seatbacks have three  
available positions — folded forward, upright, or  
partially reclined. Each of the rear seatbacks  
can be moved to any of the three positions  
independent of the other seatback position.  
2. Continue raising the seatback until the  
seatback re-engages.  
{CAUTION:  
If the seatback is not locked, it could  
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.  
That could cause injury to the person  
sitting there. Always push and pull on  
the seatback to be sure it is locked.  
{CAUTION:  
A safety belt that is improperly routed,  
not properly attached, or twisted will not  
provide the protection needed in a crash.  
The person wearing the belt could be  
seriously injured. After raising the rear  
seatback, always check to be sure that  
the safety belts are properly routed and  
attached, and are not twisted.  
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it  
is locked in place.  
The recliner lever is also used to recline the  
seatback while a passenger is seated. See Manual  
Reclining Seatbacks on page 12.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety  
belts still fastened may cause damage to the  
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle  
the safety belts and return them to their normal  
stowed position before folding a rear seat.  
Prior to lowering the seatback, ensure all three of  
the seatbelts are unbuckled and the front seats  
are not reclined.  
{CAUTION:  
If the seatback is not locked, it could  
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.  
That could cause injury to the person  
sitting there. Always push and pull on  
the seatback to be sure it is locked.  
Lift the lever on the upper back corner of the  
seatback to move it to the desired position and  
then release it. Push and pull on the seatback to  
be sure it is locked in place.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Belts  
{CAUTION:  
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone  
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a  
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.  
In a collision, people riding in these areas  
are more likely to be seriously injured or  
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any  
area of your vehicle that is not equipped  
with seats and safety belts. Be sure  
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and  
using a safety belt properly.  
This part of the manual tells you how to use  
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things  
you should not do with safety belts.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not let anyone ride where he or she  
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you  
are in a crash and you are not wearing a  
safety belt, your injuries can be much  
worse. You can hit things inside the  
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be  
seriously injured or killed. In the same  
crash, you might not be, if you are  
buckled up. Always fasten your safety  
belt, and check that your passengers’  
belts are fastened properly too.  
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and  
your passengers to buckle your safety belts. See  
Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 164 and  
page 165.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In most states and in all Canadian provinces,  
the law says to wear safety belts. Here is  
why: They work.  
Why Safety Belts Work  
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast  
as it goes.  
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you  
do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a  
bad one.  
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can  
be so serious that even buckled up, a person  
would not survive. But most crashes are in  
between. In many of them, people who buckle up  
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without  
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.  
After more than 40 years of safety belts in  
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes  
buckling up does matter... a lot!  
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a  
seat on wheels.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Put someone on it.  
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.  
The rider does not stop.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The person keeps going until stopped by  
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the  
windshield...  
or the instrument panel...  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Questions and Answers About  
Safety Belts  
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an  
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?  
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a  
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a  
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And  
your chance of being conscious during and  
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get  
out, is much greater if you are belted.  
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I  
have to wear safety belts?  
or the safety belts!  
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so  
they work with safety belts — not instead of  
them. Every airbag system ever offered  
for sale has required the use of safety belts.  
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,  
you still have to buckle up to get the most  
protection. That is true not only in frontal  
collisions, but especially in side and other  
collisions.  
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle  
does. You get more time to stop. You stop  
over more distance, and your strongest bones  
take the forces. That is why safety belts  
make such good sense.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly  
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive  
far from home, why should I wear safety  
belts?  
This part is only for people of adult size.  
Be aware that there are special things to know  
about safety belts and children. And there are  
different rules for smaller children and babies.  
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see Older  
on page 45. Follow those rules for everyone’s  
protection.  
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are  
in an accident — even one that is not your  
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.  
Being a good driver does not protect you  
from things beyond your control, such as  
bad drivers.  
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)  
of home. And the greatest number of serious  
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than  
40 mph (65 km/h).  
First, you will want to know which restraint  
systems your vehicle has.  
We will start with the driver position.  
Safety belts are for everyone.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the  
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,  
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.  
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.  
Driver Position  
Lap-Shoulder Belt  
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to  
wear it properly.  
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it  
clicks.  
1. Close and lock the door.  
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is  
secure. If the belt is not long enough,  
see Safety Belt Extender on page 41.  
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To  
see how, see “Seats” in the Index.  
Make sure the release button on the buckle is  
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle  
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.  
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the  
height that is right for you. Improper shoulder  
belt height adjustment could reduce the  
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See  
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across  
you. Do not let it get twisted.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the  
shoulder belt.  
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the  
safety belt through the latch plate to fully  
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.  
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and  
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a  
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.  
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap  
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at  
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even  
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the  
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the  
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.  
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop  
or crash.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder  
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would  
move forward too much, which could  
increase injury. The shoulder belt should  
fit against your body.  
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give  
nearly as much protection this way.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt  
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide  
under the lap belt and apply force at your  
abdomen. This could cause serious or  
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be  
worn low and snug on the hips, just  
touching the thighs.  
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly  
as much protection this way.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if your belt is  
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a  
crash, the belt would go up over your  
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,  
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause  
serious internal injuries. Always buckle  
your belt into the buckle nearest you.  
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if your belt  
goes over an armrest like this. The belt  
would be much too high. In a crash, you  
can slide under the belt. The belt force  
would then be applied at the abdomen,  
not at the pelvic bones, and that could  
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the  
belt goes under the armrests.  
A: The belt is over an armrest.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured if you wear  
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a  
crash, your body would move too far  
forward, which would increase the chance  
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt  
would apply too much force to the ribs,  
which are not as strong as shoulder  
bones. You could also severely injure  
internal organs like your liver or spleen.  
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It  
should be worn over the shoulder at all times.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What is wrong with this?  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously injured by a twisted  
belt. In a crash, you would not have the  
full width of the belt to spread impact  
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight  
so it can work properly, or ask your  
retailer to fix it.  
A: The belt is twisted across the body.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment  
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt  
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.  
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion  
of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt  
should be away from your face and neck, but  
not falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulder belt  
height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness  
of the safety belt in a crash.  
To move it up or down,  
squeeze the release  
buttons (A) together  
and move the height  
adjuster to the desired  
position.  
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.  
The belt should go back out of the way.  
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out  
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can  
damage both the belt and your vehicle.  
After you move the height adjuster to where  
you want it, try to move it up or down without  
squeezing the release buttons to make sure it has  
locked into position.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect  
the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly,  
it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt  
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,  
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing  
them properly.  
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy  
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant  
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely  
to be seriously injured if they do not wear  
safety belts.  
Right Front Passenger Position  
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s  
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on  
page 26.  
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the  
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except  
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion  
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the  
child restraint locking feature. If this happens, let  
the belt go back all the way and start again.  
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder  
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low  
as possible, below the rounding, throughout  
the pregnancy.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lap-Shoulder Belt  
Rear Seat Passengers  
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.  
Here is how to wear one properly.  
It is very important for rear seat passengers to  
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted  
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in  
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.  
Rear passengers who are not safety belted  
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.  
And they can strike others in the vehicle who  
are wearing safety belts.  
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across  
you. Do not let it get twisted.  
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt  
across you very quickly. If this happens, let  
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull  
the belt across you more slowly.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until  
it clicks.  
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is  
secure.  
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt  
Extender on page 41.  
Make sure the release button on the buckle is  
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle  
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.  
For the center rear position, if the belt stops  
before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate  
and keep pulling until you can buckle it.  
For the outboard rear positions, when the  
shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will  
lock. If it does, let it go back all the way  
and start again.  
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the  
shoulder part.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder  
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would  
move forward too much, which could  
increase injury. The shoulder belt should  
fit against your body.  
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and  
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a  
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.  
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap  
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at  
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even  
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the  
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the  
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.  
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.  
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or  
a crash.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides  
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide  
added safety belt comfort for older children  
who have outgrown booster seats and for some  
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the  
comfort guide positions the belt away from  
the neck and head.  
There is one guide for each outboard passenger  
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install  
a comfort guide to the safety belt:  
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip, which  
is behind the seatback. Pull the elastic cord  
out from between the edge of the seatback  
and the interior body.  
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt.  
The elastic cord must be under the belt.  
Then, place the guide over the belt, and  
insert the two edges of the belt into the slots  
of the guide.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION: (Continued)  
be seriously injured. The shoulder belt  
should go over the shoulder and across  
the chest. These parts of the body are  
best able to take belt restraining forces.  
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies  
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt  
and the guide on top.  
{CAUTION:  
A safety belt that is not properly worn may  
not provide the protection needed in a  
crash. The person wearing the belt could  
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt  
as described in Rear Seat Passengers on  
page 36. Make sure that the shoulder  
belt crosses the shoulder.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze  
the belt edges together so that you can take  
them out of the guide. Pull the guide upward  
to expose its storage clip, and then slide the  
guide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inward  
and slide them in between the seatback and  
the interior body, leaving only the loop of  
the elastic cord exposed.  
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate  
in a crash, you will need to get new ones,  
and probably other new parts for your safety belt  
After a Crash on page 91.  
Safety Belt Extender  
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,  
you should use it.  
Safety Belt Pretensioners  
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your retailer  
will order you an extender. When you go in to  
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,  
so the extender will be long enough for you.  
To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone  
else use it, and use it only for the seat it is  
made to fit. The extender has been designed  
for adults. Never use it for securing child seats.  
To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.  
For more information, see the instruction sheet  
that comes with the extender.  
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the  
driver and right front passenger. Although you  
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt  
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during  
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal  
or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions  
for pretensioner activation are met. And, if  
your vehicle has roof-mounted rollover airbags,  
safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the  
safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety  
Child Restraints  
belts?  
Older Children  
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt  
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt  
can provide. The shoulder belt should not  
cross the face or neck. The lap belt should  
fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top  
of the thighs. It should never be worn over  
the abdomen, which could cause severe  
or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.  
According to accident statistics, children are safer  
when properly restrained in the rear seating  
positions than in the front seating positions.  
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can  
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be  
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need  
to use safety belts properly.  
Older children who have outgrown booster seats  
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder  
belt, but the child is so small that the  
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s  
face or neck?  
{CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a  
window, move the child toward the center  
of the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety Belt  
Comfort Guides on page 39. If the child is  
sitting in the center rear seat passenger  
position, move the child toward the safety  
belt buckle. In either case, be sure that  
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,  
so that in a crash the child’s upper body  
would have the restraint that belts provide.  
Here two children are wearing the same  
belt. The belt cannot properly spread the  
impact forces. In a crash, the two children  
can be crushed together and seriously  
injured. A belt must be used by only one  
person at a time.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
Never do this.  
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a  
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is  
behind the child. If the child wears the  
belt in this way, in a crash the child might  
slide under the belt. The belt’s force  
would then be applied right on the child’s  
abdomen. That could cause serious or  
fatal injuries.  
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt  
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just  
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force  
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Infants and Young Children  
{CAUTION:  
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This  
includes infants and all other children. Neither the  
distance traveled nor the age and size of the  
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use  
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state  
in the United States and in every Canadian  
province says children up to some age must be  
restrained while in a vehicle.  
Children can be seriously injured or  
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped  
around their neck and the safety belt  
continues to tighten. Never leave children  
unattended in a vehicle and never allow  
children to play with the safety belts.  
Every time infants and young children ride in  
vehicles, they should have the protection provided  
by appropriate restraints. Young children should  
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,  
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need  
to use a child restraint.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{CAUTION:  
People should never hold a baby in their  
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby  
does not weigh much — until a crash.  
During a crash a baby will become so  
heavy it is not possible to hold it.  
For example, in a crash at only  
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby  
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg)  
force on a person’s arms. A baby should  
be secured in an appropriate restraint.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
Children who are up against, or very close  
to, any airbag when it inflates can be  
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus  
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for  
adults and older children, but not for  
young children and infants. Neither the  
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag  
system is designed for them. Young  
children and infants need the protection  
that a child restraint system can provide.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: What are the different types of add-on  
child restraints?  
{CAUTION:  
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by  
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic  
types. Selection of a particular restraint should  
take into consideration not only the child’s  
weight, height, and age but also whether or not  
the restraint will be compatible with the motor  
vehicle in which it will be used.  
Newborn infants need complete support,  
including support for the head and neck.  
This is necessary because a newborn  
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs  
so much compared with the rest of its  
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing  
seat settles into the restraint, so the crash  
forces can be distributed across the  
strongest part of an infant’s body, the  
back and shoulders. Infants always  
should be secured in appropriate infant  
restraints.  
For most basic types of child restraints, there  
are many different models available. When  
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is  
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,  
the restraint will have a label saying that it  
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.  
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that  
come with the restraint state the weight and  
height limitations for a particular child restraint.  
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints  
available for children with special needs.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Child Restraint Systems  
{CAUTION:  
The body structure of a young child is  
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,  
for whom the safety belts are designed. A  
young child’s hip bones are still so small  
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may  
not remain low on the hip bones, as it  
should. Instead, it may settle up around  
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt  
would apply force on a body area that is  
unprotected by any bony structure. This  
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.  
Young children always should be secured  
in appropriate child restraints.  
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use  
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system  
designed to restrain or position a child on a  
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s  
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with  
the seating surface against the back of the  
infant. The harness system holds the infant in  
place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant  
positioned in the restraint.  
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint  
for the child’s body with the harness and also  
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped  
or shelf-like shields.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?  
A: A child restraint system is any device designed  
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,  
or position children. A built-in child restraint  
system is a permanent part of the motor  
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system  
is a portable one, which is purchased by the  
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an  
add-on child restraint must be secured in the  
vehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,  
the child has to be secured within the child  
restraint.  
When choosing an add-on child restraint,  
be sure the child restraint is designed to  
be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label  
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle  
safety standards. Then follow the instructions  
for the restraint. You may find these  
instructions on the restraint itself or in  
a booklet, or both.  
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed  
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt  
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt  
positioner, and some high-back booster seats  
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can  
also help a child to see out the window.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child  
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child  
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats  
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder  
belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors  
more information. A child can be endangered in a  
crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in  
the vehicle.  
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in  
the Vehicle  
{CAUTION:  
A child can be seriously injured or killed  
in a crash if the child restraint is not  
properly secured in the vehicle. Make  
sure the child restraint is properly  
installed in the vehicle using the vehicle’s  
safety belt or LATCH system, following  
the instructions that came with that  
restraint, and also the instructions in  
this manual.  
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer  
to the instructions that come with the restraint  
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,  
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint  
instructions are important, so if they are not  
available, obtain a replacement copy from the  
manufacturer.  
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  
move around in a collision or sudden stop and  
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly  
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even  
when no child is in it.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Because there are different systems, it is important  
to refer to the instructions that come with the  
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if  
the child is not properly secured in the child  
restraint.  
Securing the Child Within the Child  
Restraint  
There are several systems for securing the  
child within the child restraint. One system, the  
three-point harness, has straps that come down  
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle  
together at the crotch. The five-point harness  
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and  
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip  
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that  
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against  
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has  
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield  
that swings up or to the side.  
Where to Put the Restraint  
Accident statistics show that children are safer  
if they are restrained in the rear rather than  
the front seat.  
We recommend that children be secured in a rear  
seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a  
rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a  
forward-facing child seat; an older child riding  
in a booster seat; and children, who are large  
enough, using safety belts.  
{CAUTION:  
A child can be seriously injured or killed  
in a crash if the child is not properly  
secured in the child restraint. Make sure  
the child is properly secured, following  
the instructions that came with that  
restraint.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a  
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because  
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the  
airbag deploys.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
We recommend that rear-facing child  
restraints be secured in the rear seat,  
even if the airbag is off.  
{CAUTION:  
If you need to secure a forward-facing  
child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat as  
far back as it will go. It is better to secure  
the child restraint in a rear seat.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can  
be seriously injured or killed if the right  
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is  
because the back of the rear-facing child  
restraint would be very close to the  
inflating airbag.  
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will  
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we  
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be  
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.  
Even though the passenger sensing  
system is designed to turn off the right  
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the  
system detects a rear-facing child  
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no  
one can guarantee that an airbag will not  
deploy under some unusual circumstance,  
even though it is turned off.  
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to  
secure the child restraint properly.  
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can  
move around in a collision or sudden stop and  
injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly  
secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even  
when no child is in it.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints  
have lower anchors and attachments or top  
tether anchors and attachments.  
Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
Children (LATCH)  
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during  
driving or in a crash. This system is designed  
to make installation of a child restraint easier.  
The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle  
and attachments on the child restraint that  
are made for use with the LATCH system.  
Lower Anchors  
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint  
is properly installed using the anchors, or use  
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,  
following the instructions that came with that  
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.  
When installing a child restraint with a top tether,  
you must also use either the lower anchors or the  
safety belts to properly secure the child restraint.  
A child restraint must never be installed using only  
the top tether and anchor.  
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the  
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each  
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a  
child restraint with lower attachments (B).  
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,  
you need a child restraint that has LATCH  
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer  
will provide you with instructions on how to use  
the child restraint and its attachments. The  
following explains how to attach a child restraint  
with these attachments in your vehicle.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)  
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single  
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to  
the anchor.  
Top Tether Anchor  
Some child restraints that have top tethers are  
designed for use with or without the top tether being  
attached. Others require the top tether always to  
be attached. In Canada, the law requires that  
forward-facing child restraints have a top  
tether, and that the tether be attached. In the  
United States, some child restraints also have  
a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the  
instructions for your child restraint.  
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,  
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many  
child restraints. Ask the child restraint  
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child  
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built  
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)  
on the child restraint connects to the top tether  
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward  
movement and rotation of the child restraint  
during driving or in a crash.  
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor  
Locations  
i (Top Tether Anchor):  
Seating positions with  
top tether anchors.  
j (Lower Anchor):  
Seating positions with  
two lower anchors.  
Rear Seat  
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front  
passenger’s position if a national or local law  
requires that the top tether be attached, or if the  
instructions that come with the child restraint  
say that the top tether must be attached. There is  
no place to attach the top tether in this position.  
Each rear seating position has exposed metal  
anchors located in the crease between the  
seatback and the seat cushion.  
The top tether anchors are located on the back  
of the rear seatback. Be sure to use an anchor  
located on the same side of the vehicle as  
the seating position where the child restraint  
will be placed.  
Accident statistics show that children are safer  
if they are restrained in the rear rather than  
the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint  
on page 53 for additional information.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for  
the LATCH System  
{CAUTION:  
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor  
in the vehicle is designed to hold only one  
child restraint. Attaching more than one  
child restraint to a single anchor could  
cause the anchor or attachment to come  
loose or even break during a crash. A  
child or others could be injured if this  
happens. To help prevent injury to people  
and damage to your vehicle, attach only  
one child restraint per anchor.  
{CAUTION:  
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not  
attached to anchors, the restraint will not  
be able to protect the child correctly. In a  
crash, the child could be seriously injured  
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type  
child restraint is properly installed using  
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety  
belts to secure the restraint, following the  
instructions that came with that restraint,  
and also the instructions in this manual.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety  
belts secured may cause damage to the safety  
belt or the seat. When removing the child  
restraint, always remember to return the safety  
belts to their normal, stowed position before  
folding the rear seat.  
{CAUTION:  
Children can be seriously injured or  
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped  
around their neck and the safety belt  
continues to tighten. Secure any unused  
safety belts behind the child restraint  
so children cannot reach them. Pull the  
shoulder belt all the way out of the  
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle  
has one, after the child restraint has  
been installed. Be sure to follow the  
instructions of the child restraint  
manufacturer.  
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to  
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does  
not have lower attachments or the desired  
seating position does not have lower anchors,  
secure the child restraint with the top tether  
and the safety belts. Refer to your child  
restraint manufacturer instructions and the  
instructions in this manual.  
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired  
seating position.  
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower  
attachments on the child restraint to the  
lower anchors.  
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or  
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s  
safety belt assembly may cause damage to  
these parts. Make sure when securing unused  
safety belts behind the child restraint that  
there is no contact between the child restraint  
or the LATCH attachment parts and the  
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends  
that the top tether be attached, attach and  
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,  
if equipped. Refer to the child restraint  
If the position you are  
using does not have a  
head restraint and you  
are using a dual tether,  
route the tether over  
the seatback.  
instructions and the following steps:  
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.  
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether  
according to your child restraint  
instructions and the following  
instructions:  
If the position you are  
using does not have a  
head restraint and  
you are using a single  
tether, route the  
tether over the  
seatback.  
If the position you are  
using has an adjustable  
head restraint and you  
are using a dual tether,  
route the tether around  
the head restraint.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the position you are  
using has an adjustable  
head restraint and you  
are using a single tether,  
raise the head restraint  
and route the tether  
under the head restraint  
and in between the head  
restraint posts.  
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear  
Outside Seat Position  
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,  
(LATCH) on page 55.  
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH  
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder  
belt to secure the child restraint in this position.  
Be sure to follow the instructions that came  
with the child restraint. Secure the child in the  
child restraint when and as the instructions say.  
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and  
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt  
through or around the restraint. The child  
restraint instructions will show you how.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button  
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle  
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.  
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way  
out of the retractor to set the lock.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. If your child restraint manufacturer  
recommends using a top tether, attach and  
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.  
Refer to the instructions that came with the  
child restraint and to Lower Anchors and  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is  
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect  
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it  
go back all the way. The safety belt will move  
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or  
larger child passenger.  
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child  
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt  
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and  
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.  
If you are using a forward-facing child  
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your  
knee to push down on the child restraint  
as you tighten the belt.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing a Child Restraint in the  
Center Rear Seat Position  
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,  
(LATCH) on page 55.  
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH  
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder  
belt to secure the child restraint in this position.  
Be sure to follow the instructions that came  
with the child restraint. Secure the child in the  
child restraint when and as the instructions say.  
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.  
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and  
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt  
through or around the restraint. The child  
restraint instructions will show you how.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button  
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle  
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.  
4. To tighten the belt, push down on the child  
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt  
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and  
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.  
If you are using a forward-facing child  
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your  
knee to push down on the child restraint  
as you tighten the belt.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. If your child restraint has a top tether, attach  
and tighten the top tether to the top tether  
anchor. Refer to the instructions that came with  
the child restraint and to Lower Anchors and  
Securing a Child Restraint in the  
Right Front Seat Position  
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s  
airbag. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a  
forward-facing child restraint. See Where to  
Put the Restraint on page 53.  
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing  
system. The passenger sensing system is designed  
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag  
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small  
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster  
seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing System  
on page 166 for more information on this including  
important safety information.  
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is  
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect  
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it  
go back all the way. The safety belt will move  
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or  
larger child passenger.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a  
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because  
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the  
airbag deploys.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
We recommend that rear-facing child  
restraints be secured in the rear seat,  
even if the airbag is off.  
{CAUTION:  
If you need to secure a forward-facing  
child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat as  
far back as it will go. It is better to secure  
the child restraint in a rear seat.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can  
be seriously injured or killed if the right  
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is  
because the back of the rear-facing child  
restraint would be very close to the  
inflating airbag.  
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will  
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we  
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not  
be transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag  
is off.  
Even though the passenger sensing  
system is designed to turn off the right  
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the  
system detects a rear-facing child  
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no  
one can guarantee that an airbag will not  
deploy under some unusual circumstance,  
even though it is turned off.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,  
(LATCH) on page 55.  
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal  
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on  
page 82. We recommend that rear-facing child  
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if  
the airbag is off.  
There is no top tether anchor at the right front  
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this  
position if a national or local law requires that  
the top tether be anchored or if the instructions  
that come with the child restraint say that the top  
tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors  
the child restraint has a top tether.  
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before  
securing the forward-facing child restraint.  
See Manual Seats on page 9.  
When the passenger sensing system has  
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal  
airbag, the off indicator in the passenger  
airbag status indicator should light and stay lit  
when you start the vehicle. See Passenger  
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure  
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow  
the instructions that came with the child restraint.  
Secure the child in the child restraint when and  
as the instructions say.  
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.  
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and  
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt  
through or around the restraint. The child  
restraint instructions will show you how.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button  
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle  
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.  
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way  
out of the retractor to set the lock.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the airbag is off, the off indicator will be lit and  
stay lit when you start the vehicle.  
If a child restraint has been installed and the  
on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the  
child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the  
child restraint.  
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting  
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to  
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not  
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.  
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s  
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.  
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped  
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,  
adjust the head restraint.  
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child  
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to  
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the  
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are  
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may  
find it helpful to use your knee to push down on  
the child restraint as you tighten the belt. You  
should not be able to pull more of the belt from  
the retractor once the lock has been set.  
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in  
the child restraint in a rear seat position in  
the vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.  
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the  
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the  
way. The safety belt will move freely again  
and be ready to work for an adult or larger  
child passenger.  
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different  
directions to be sure it is secure.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Airbag System  
{CAUTION:  
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver  
and a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.  
Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted side  
impact airbags designed for either side impact or  
rollover deployment. Roof-mounted side impact  
airbags are available for the driver and the  
passenger seated directly behind the driver and  
for the right front passenger and the passenger  
seated directly behind that passenger.  
Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag. In  
a crash, an inflating airbag might force that  
object toward a person. This could cause  
severe injury or even death. Secure objects  
away from the area in which an airbag  
would inflate. For more information, see  
Where Are the Airbags? on page 75 and  
Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.  
If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact  
airbags, the words AIR BAG will appear on the  
airbag covering on the ceiling near the driver’s and  
right front passenger’s window.  
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection  
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s  
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk  
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all  
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.  
Even if you have no right front passenger seat  
in your vehicle there is still an active frontal airbag  
in the right side of the instrument panel. Do not  
place cargo in front of this airbag.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Here are the most important things to know about  
the airbag system:  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Frontal airbags for the driver and right  
front passenger are designed to deploy in  
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal  
crashes. They are not designed to inflate  
in rollover, rear crashes, or in many side  
crashes. And, for some unrestrained  
occupants, frontal airbags may provide  
less protection in frontal crashes than  
more forceful airbags have provided in  
the past.  
{CAUTION:  
You can be severely injured or killed in a  
crash if you are not wearing your safety  
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing  
your safety belt during a crash helps  
reduce your chance of hitting things  
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.  
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to  
the safety belts. All airbags are designed  
to work with safety belts but do not  
replace them.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
{CAUTION:  
Roof-mounted rollover airbags are  
designed to inflate in moderate to severe  
crashes where something hits the side of  
your vehicle or during a vehicle rollover.  
They may inflate in some frontal crashes.  
They are not designed to inflate in rear  
crashes. If your vehicle has roof-mounted  
airbags, they are designed to provide  
both side impact protection and  
rollover protection. Everyone in your  
vehicle should wear a safety belt  
properly — whether or not there is  
an airbag for that person.  
Both frontal and roof-mounted side impact  
airbags inflate with great force, faster than  
the blink of an eye. If you are too close to  
an inflating airbag, as you would be if you  
were leaning forward, it could seriously  
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in  
position for airbag inflation before and  
during a crash. Always wear your safety  
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver  
should sit as far back as possible while  
still maintaining control of the vehicle.  
Occupants should not lean on or sleep  
against the door.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
There is an airbag  
readiness light on the  
instrument panel cluster,  
which shows the  
{CAUTION:  
Anyone who is up against, or very close  
to, any airbag when it inflates can be  
seriously injured or killed. Airbags  
plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best  
protection for adults, but not for young  
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s  
safety belt system nor its airbag system is  
designed for them. Young children and  
infants need the protection that a child  
restraint system can provide. Always  
secure children properly in your vehicle.  
To read how, see Older Children on  
on page 45.  
airbag symbol.  
The system checks the airbag electrical system  
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is  
an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light  
on page 165 for more information.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where Are the Airbags?  
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the  
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.  
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the  
steering wheel.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact  
airbag for the driver and the person seated directly  
behind the driver, it is in the ceiling above the  
side windows.  
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact  
airbag for the right front passenger and the person  
seated directly behind that passenger, it is in  
the ceiling above the side windows.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When Should an Airbag Inflate?  
{CAUTION:  
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal  
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to  
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are  
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a  
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment  
thresholds take into account a variety of desired  
deployment and non-deployment events and are  
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in  
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the  
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or  
should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle  
is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the  
direction of the impact, and how quickly your  
vehicle slows down.  
If something is between an occupant  
and an airbag, the bag might not inflate  
properly or it might force the object into  
that person causing severe injury or even  
death. The path of an inflating airbag must  
be kept clear. Do not put anything between  
an occupant and an airbag, and do not  
attach or put anything on the steering  
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag  
covering. And, if your vehicle has  
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never  
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle  
by routing the rope or tie down through any  
door or window opening. If you do, the path  
of an inflating side impact airbag will be  
blocked. The path of an inflating airbag  
must be kept clear.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal  
airbags, which adjust the restraint according  
to crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts,  
these airbags inflate at a level less than full  
deployment. For more severe frontal impacts,  
full deployment occurs. If the front of your vehicle  
goes straight into a wall that does not move or  
deform, the threshold level for the reduced  
deployment is about 10 to 15 mph (16 to 24 km/h),  
and the threshold level for a full deployment is  
about 17 to 25 mph (27 to 40 km/h). The threshold  
level can vary, however, with specific vehicle  
design, so that it can be somewhat above or  
below this range.  
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash  
speeds. For example:  
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the  
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed  
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.  
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,  
the airbags could inflate at a different  
crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object  
that does not deform.  
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),  
the airbags could inflate at a different crash  
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object  
(like a wall).  
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,  
the airbags could inflate at a different crash  
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into  
the object.  
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)  
are not intended to inflate during vehicle  
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mounted  
side impact airbags and a rollover sensor. See  
Airbag System on page 71. These roof-mounted  
“rollover capable” side impact airbags are intended  
to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes, and  
during a rollover. They may also inflate in some  
frontal crashes. Both rollover capable side impact  
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the  
system’s designed “threshold level.” The threshold  
level can vary with specific vehicle design. Side  
impact airbags are not intended to inflate in rear  
impacts. Both side impact airbags will deploy when  
either side of the vehicle is struck. If your vehicle  
does not have a right front passenger seat and a  
rear seat, only the driver’s frontal airbag will deploy  
in a frontal impact.  
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?  
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag  
sensing system detects that the vehicle is  
in a crash. Additionally, in the case of a “rollover  
capable” roof-mounted side impact airbag, the  
sensing system detects that the vehicle is about to  
roll over. The sensing system triggers a release  
of gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.  
For the frontal airbags, the inflator, airbag, and  
related hardware are all part of the airbag modules  
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument  
panel in front of the right front passenger.  
For vehicles with roof-mounted rollover airbags,  
the airbag modules, the inflator, and the airbags  
are located in the ceiling of the vehicle, near  
the side windows.  
In any particular crash, no one can say whether  
an airbag should have inflated simply because  
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the  
repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is  
determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle  
of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows  
down. For side impact airbags, inflation is  
determined by the location and severity of  
the impact.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How Does an Airbag Restrain?  
What Will You See After an Airbag  
Inflates?  
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal  
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the  
steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate  
to severe side collisions, even belted occupants  
can contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbags  
supplement the protection provided by safety belts.  
Airbags distribute the force of the impact more  
evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping  
the occupant more gradually. But the frontal airbags  
would not help you in many types of collisions,  
including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side  
impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion  
is not toward the airbag. Roof-mounted rollover  
airbags would not help you in many types of  
collisions, including many frontal or near frontal  
collisions, and rear impacts.  
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so  
quickly that some people may not even realize  
the airbag inflated. Some components of the  
airbag module may be hot for a short time. These  
components include the steering wheel hub for the  
driver’s frontal airbag and the instrument panel for  
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. For  
vehicles with roof-mounted side impact airbags,  
the ceiling of your vehicle near the side windows  
may be hot. The parts of the airbag that come into  
contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to  
touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming  
from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag  
inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing or  
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent  
people from leaving the vehicle.  
Airbags should never be regarded as anything  
more than a supplement to safety belts, and  
then only in moderate to severe frontal or  
near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right  
front passenger’s frontal airbags, and only  
in moderate to severe side collisions or rollovers  
for vehicles with roof-mounted rollover airbags.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically  
unlock the doors, turn the interior dome lamp  
on, and flash the exterior lamps on and off when  
the airbags inflate. You can lock the doors  
again and turn the interior lamps off by using the  
door lock and interior lamp controls. You must  
first, however, turn your ignition key to the  
following ignition switch positions:  
{CAUTION:  
When an airbag inflates, there may be  
dust in the air. This dust could cause  
breathing problems for people with a  
history of asthma or other breathing  
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the  
vehicle should get out as soon as it is  
safe to do so. If you have breathing  
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle  
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air  
by opening a window or a door. If you  
experience breathing problems following  
an airbag deployment, you should seek  
medical attention.  
1. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.  
2. Turn the ignition key to RUN.  
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an  
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle  
deformation.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional windshield breakage may also occur  
from the right front passenger airbag.  
Passenger Sensing System  
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system.  
The passenger airbag status indicator on the  
instrument panel will be visible when you turn  
your ignition key to RUN or START.  
Airbags are designed to inflate only once.  
After an airbag inflates, you will need some new  
parts for the airbag system. If you do not get  
them, the airbag system will not be there to help  
protect you in another crash. A new system will  
include airbag modules and possibly other  
parts. The service manual for your vehicle  
covers the need to replace other parts.  
Your vehicle has a crash sensing and  
diagnostic module which records information  
Privacy on page 455 and Event Data  
Recorders on page 455.  
United States  
Canada  
The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on  
and off, will be visible during the system check.  
When the system check is complete, either  
the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol  
for on or the symbol for off will be visible.  
page 166.  
Let only qualified technicians work on the  
airbag system. Improper service can mean  
that the airbag system will not work properly.  
See your retailer for service.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The passenger sensing system will turn off the  
right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain  
conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of  
the passenger sensing system.  
{CAUTION:  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can  
be seriously injured or killed if the right  
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is  
because the back of the rear-facing child  
restraint would be very close to the  
inflating airbag.  
The passenger sensing system works with  
sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s  
seat. The sensors are designed to detect the  
presence of a properly-seated occupant and  
determine if the passenger’s frontal airbag  
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.  
Even though the passenger sensing  
system is designed to turn off the  
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system  
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no  
system is fail-safe, and no one can  
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy  
under some unusual circumstance, even  
though it is turned off. We recommend  
that rear-facing child restraints be secured  
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.  
Accident statistics show that children are safer  
if they are restrained in the rear rather than  
the front seat. We recommend that child restraints  
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant  
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in  
a forward-facing child seat, and an older child  
riding in a booster seat.  
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will  
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, there  
is a label on your sun visor that says, “Never  
put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is  
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great  
if the airbag deploys.  
If you need to secure a forward-facing  
child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat as  
far back as it will go. It is better to secure  
the child restraint in a rear seat.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that  
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,  
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint  
in the right front passenger seat unless the  
passenger airbag status indicator shows off  
and the airbag is off. Here is why:  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Even though the passenger sensing  
system is designed to turn off the  
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system  
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no  
system is fail-safe, and no one can  
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy  
under some unusual circumstance, even  
though it is turned off. We recommend  
that rear-facing child restraints be  
transported in vehicles with a rear seat  
that will accommodate a rear-facing child  
restraint, whenever possible.  
{CAUTION:  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can  
be seriously injured or killed if the right  
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is  
because the back of the rear-facing child  
restraint would be very close to the  
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off  
before using a rear-facing child restraint  
in the right front seat position.  
If you need to secure a forward-facing  
child restraint in the right front seat,  
always move the front passenger seat as  
far back as it will go. It is better to secure  
the child restraint in a rear seat.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn  
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:  
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a  
on page 66.  
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.  
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting  
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make  
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the  
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,  
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the  
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child  
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head  
restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.  
The system determines that an infant is  
present in a rear-facing infant seat.  
The system determines that a small child is  
present in a forward-facing child restraint.  
The system determines that a small child is  
present in a booster seat.  
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off  
of the seat for a period of time.  
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in  
the child restraint in a rear seat position in  
the vehicle if one is available and check with  
your retailer.  
The right front passenger seat is occupied by  
a smaller person, such as a child who has  
outgrown child restraints.  
The passenger sensing system is designed to  
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s  
frontal airbag anytime the system senses  
that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the  
right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger  
sensing system has allowed the airbag to be  
enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit  
to remind you that the airbag is active.  
Or, there is a critical problem with the airbag  
system or the passenger sensing system.  
When the passenger sensing system has turned  
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off  
indicator on the instrument panel will light and  
stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.  
If a child restraint has been installed and the  
on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the  
child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the  
child restraint following the child restraint  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For some children who have outgrown child  
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger  
sensing system may or may not turn off the right  
front passenger’s frontal airbag, depending upon  
the person’s seating posture and body build.  
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown  
child restraints should wear a safety belt  
properly — whether or not there is an airbag  
for that person.  
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front  
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it  
could be because that person is not sitting properly  
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off  
and ask the person to place the seatback in  
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the  
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the  
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the  
vehicle and have the person remain in this position  
for about two minutes. This will allow the system  
to detect that person and then enable the  
passenger’s airbag.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
including a small adult, sits in the passenger  
position. You may want to consider not using  
seat covers or other aftermarket equipment if  
your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.  
Vehicle on page 89.  
{CAUTION:  
If the airbag readiness light in the  
instrument panel cluster ever comes on  
and stays on, it means that something  
may be wrong with the airbag system.  
If this ever happens, have the vehicle  
serviced promptly, because an adult-size  
person sitting in the right front  
passenger’s seat may not have the  
protection of the airbag(s). See Airbag  
Readiness Light on page 165 for more  
on this, including important safety  
information.  
The passenger sensing system may suppress the  
airbag deployment when liquid is soaked into  
the seat. If this happens, the off indicator in the  
passenger airbag status indicator and the airbag  
readiness light on the instrument panel will be lit.  
The system should resume normal operation after  
the seat is allowed to dry. If the system operates  
incorrectly after the seat has dried, have your  
retailer check the system.  
{CAUTION:  
A thick layer of additional material such as a  
blanket, or aftermarket equipment such as  
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers,  
can affect how well the passenger sensing system  
operates. Remove any additional material from  
the seat cushion before reinstalling or securing  
the child restraint and before a small occupant,  
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s  
seat or between the passenger’s seat  
cushion and seatback may interfere with  
the proper operation of the passenger  
sensing system.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped  
Vehicle  
{CAUTION:  
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be  
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system  
in several places around your vehicle. You do  
not want the system to inflate while someone is  
working on your vehicle. Your retailer and the  
service manual have information about servicing  
your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase  
a service manual, see Service Publications  
Ordering Information on page 453.  
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is  
turned off and the battery is disconnected,  
an airbag can still inflate during improper  
service. You can be injured if you are  
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid  
yellow connectors. They are probably part  
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow  
proper service procedures, and make sure  
the person performing work for you is  
qualified to do so.  
The airbag system does not need regular  
maintenance.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adding Equipment to Your  
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle  
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get  
my vehicle modified. How can I find out  
whether this will affect my airbag system?  
A: Changing or moving any parts of the  
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing  
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,  
instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceiling  
and pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbag  
modules, or airbag wiring can affect the  
operation of the airbag system. If you have  
questions, call Customer Assistance. The  
phone numbers and addresses for Customer  
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer  
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.  
page 440.  
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front  
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the  
airbags from working properly?  
A: Yes. If you add things that change your  
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, front  
end or side sheet metal, they may keep the  
airbag system from working properly. Also,  
the airbag system may not work properly if you  
relocate any of the airbag sensors. If you have  
any questions about this, you should contact  
Customer Assistance before you modify your  
vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses  
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of  
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this  
on page 440.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,  
and have them repaired or replaced. The airbag  
system does not need regular maintenance.  
Restraint System Check  
Checking the Restraint Systems  
Notice: If you damage the covering for the  
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,  
or the side impact airbag covering (if equipped)  
on the ceiling near the side windows, the airbag  
may not work properly. You may have to replace  
the airbag module in the steering wheel, both  
the airbag module and the instrument panel for  
the right front passenger’s airbag, or side  
impact airbag module and ceiling covering for  
roof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped.)  
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.  
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder  
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,  
retractors and anchorages are working properly.  
Look for any other loose or damaged safety  
belt system parts. If you see anything that might  
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have  
it repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 402  
for more information.  
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in  
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.  
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.  
Replacing Restraint System Parts  
After a Crash  
Collision damage also may mean you will need to  
have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts  
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may  
be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system  
was not being used at the time of the collision.  
{CAUTION:  
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag  
system parts. See the part on the airbag system  
earlier in this section.  
A crash can damage the restraint systems  
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint  
system may not properly protect the  
person using it, resulting in serious injury  
or even death in a crash. To help make  
sure your restraint systems are working  
properly after a crash, have them inspected  
and any necessary replacements made as  
soon as possible.  
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to  
replace the driver and front passenger’s safety belt  
retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the  
new retractor assembly will be there to help protect  
you in a collision.  
After a crash you may need to replace the driver  
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor  
assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not  
deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety  
belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt  
pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners  
checked if your vehicle has been in a collision,  
or if your airbag readiness light stays on after  
you start your vehicle or while you are driving.  
See Airbag Readiness Light on page 165.  
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or  
LATCH system parts?  
After a very minor collision, nothing may be  
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they  
would be if worn during a more severe crash,  
then you need new parts.  
If the LATCH system was being used during a  
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH  
system parts.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 2  
Features and Controls  
Passlock® .................................................. 108  
with OnStar®, Compass and  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keys  
{CAUTION:  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the  
ignition key is dangerous for many  
reasons, children or others could be badly  
injured or even killed. They could operate  
the power windows or other controls or  
even make the vehicle move. The windows  
will function with the keys in the ignition  
and they could be seriously injured or  
killed if caught in the path of a closing  
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle  
with children.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
One key is used for the ignition and all of  
the locks.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC  
Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions:  
Key code information can be obtained only at the  
dealer/retailer where your vehicle was purchased.  
These code numbers can be used to make new  
keys. Additional keys that are needed can be made  
at any dealer/retailer provided you have the key  
code information. Store this information in a safe  
place, but not in your vehicle.  
1. This device may not cause interference, and  
2. This device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions:  
Have extra keys made. Your service parts  
department can make extra keys for you.  
1. This device may not cause interference, and  
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your  
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle  
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.  
2. This device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
Changes or modifications to this system by other  
than an authorized service facility could void  
authorization to use this equipment.  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System  
The remote keyless entry system operates  
on a radio frequency subject to Federal  
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules  
and with Industry Canada.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
At times you may notice a decrease in range.  
This is normal for any remote keyless entry  
system. If the transmitter does not work or if  
you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the  
transmitter to work, try this:  
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)  
System Operation  
With this feature, you can lock and unlock the  
doors from about 32 feet (10 m) away using the  
remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your  
vehicle.  
Check the distance. You may be too far from  
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer  
during rainy or snowy weather.  
Q (Lock): Press this  
button on the remote  
keyless entry transmitter  
to lock the doors.  
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects  
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps  
to the left or right, hold the transmitter  
higher, and try again.  
This also arms the  
Check to determine if battery replacement or  
resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery  
Replacement” and “Resynchronization”  
Operation on page 97.  
content theft-deterrent  
system. See Content  
page 107 for information  
on arming the content  
theft-deterrent system.  
If you are still having trouble, see your  
dealer/retailer or authorized service provider  
for service.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your vehicle can be programmed so that the  
parking lamps or Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)  
will flash and/or the horn will sound when you  
lock the doors with the remote keyless entry  
transmitter. See your retailer for more information  
on programming this feature.  
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your  
Vehicle  
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to  
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your  
vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a  
replacement can be purchased through your  
retailer. Remember to bring any remaining  
transmitters with you when you go to your retailer.  
When the retailer matches the replacement  
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining  
transmitters must also be matched. Once your  
retailer has coded the new transmitter, the lost  
transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each  
vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters  
matched to it.  
"(Unlock): Press this button on the remote  
keyless entry transmitter to unlock the driver’s  
door. This also disarms the content theft-deterrent  
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on  
page 107 for information on disarming the content  
theft-deterrent system. Press the button again  
within 5 seconds to unlock the rest of the doors.  
Your vehicle can be programmed so that the  
parking lamps or DRL will flash and/or the horn will  
sound when you unlock the doors with the remote  
keyless entry transmitter. See your retailer for more  
information on programming this feature.  
Battery Replacement  
Under normal use, the battery in your remote  
keyless entry transmitter should last about  
four years.  
L(Panic Alarm): Press the button with the horn  
symbol when the ignition is turned off. The horn  
will sound and the parking lamps or DRL and  
dome lamp will flash for up to two minutes.  
To stop the panic alarm, press this button again.  
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter  
will not work at the normal range in any location.  
If you have to get close to your vehicle before  
the transmitter works, it is probably time to change  
the battery.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care  
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from  
your body transferred to these surfaces may  
damage the transmitter.  
3. Insert the new battery as the instructions  
under the cover indicate.  
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to  
be sure no moisture can enter.  
1. Use a flat thin object to pry open the  
transmitter.  
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.  
If the transmitter does not work, try synchronizing  
your transmitter with your receiver. See  
“Resynchronization” for more information.  
Resynchronization  
This is used to keep the transmitter of the vehicle  
communicating with the receiver of the vehicle.  
Resynchronization may be required due to  
the security method used by this system.  
Your vehicle has an automatic resynchronization  
function built into the system. If your transmitter is  
not working properly and you have to manually  
resynchronize, press the lock and unlock buttons  
at the same time for seven seconds while you  
are near your vehicle. The doors will lock or  
unlock, depending on their starting position.  
If they do not, contact your retailer for service.  
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a  
pencil or similar object to remove the old  
battery. Do not use a metal object.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Doors and Locks  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Door Locks  
Young children who get into unlocked  
vehicles may be unable to get out.  
A child can be overcome by extreme  
heat and can suffer permanent injuries  
or even death from heat stroke.  
Always lock your vehicle whenever  
you leave it.  
Outsiders can easily enter through an  
unlocked door when you slow down  
or stop your vehicle. Locking your  
doors can help prevent this from  
happening.  
{CAUTION:  
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.  
Passengers, especially children, can  
easily open the doors and fall out of  
a moving vehicle. When a door is  
locked, the handle will not open it.  
You increase the chance of being  
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash  
if the doors are not locked. So, wear  
safety belts properly and lock the  
doors whenever you drive.  
There are several ways to lock and unlock your  
vehicle.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
From the outside, turn the key in the driver’s  
door lock counterclockwise to lock the door and  
clockwise to unlock it or use the remote keyless  
entry transmitter.  
From the inside, move the manual lock control on  
the door or use the power door lock switch.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To cancel the delay and lock the doors  
immediately, press the lock button on the  
remote keyless entry transmitter or the power  
door lock switch a second time. The theft deterrent  
system will arm after 30 seconds.  
Power Door Locks  
The power door lock  
switches are located on  
the driver’s and front  
passenger’s doors.  
Press the bottom of the  
switch to lock all doors.  
Press the top of the  
switch to unlock all  
doors.  
Programmable Automatic Door  
Locks  
Automatic Locking  
If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, all the  
doors and liftgate will automatically lock when  
the ignition is in RUN and the shift lever is moved  
out of PARK (P).  
If your vehicle has a manual transaxle, all the  
doors and liftgate will automatically lock when  
the vehicle reaches a speed of more than  
3 mph (5 km/h).  
Delayed Locking  
This feature will delay the actual locking of the  
doors and arming of the theft-deterrent system  
for five seconds when the power door lock switch  
or remote keyless entry transmitter is used to  
lock the vehicle.  
All doors must be closed. The automatic locking  
feature cannot be disabled.  
If any door is open when locking the vehicle,  
three chimes will sound signaling that the delayed  
locking feature is active. Five seconds after the  
last door is closed, all of the doors will lock.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In the following situations, all doors will lock again  
when:  
Rear Door Security Locks  
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that  
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors  
from the inside.  
The brake pedal is applied, a door is opened  
and then closed, and the brake pedal is  
released, for a vehicle with an automatic  
transaxle.  
The rear door security  
locks are located on the  
inside edge of each  
rear door.  
A door is opened and then closed while the  
vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h),  
for a vehicle with an manual transaxle.  
Programmable Automatic Unlocking  
If your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, all  
the doors and liftgate will automatically unlock  
when the shift lever is moved into PARK (P).  
If your vehicle has a manual transaxle, all  
the doors and liftgate will automatically unlock  
when the key is removed from the ignition.  
To set the rear door security locks, do the  
following:  
The unlocking feature can be programmed on or  
off by turning the ignition to RUN, engine not  
running, and pressing the unlock part of the power  
door lock switch for eight seconds. The horn will  
chirp once when this feature is on and twice when  
it is off.  
1. Insert the key into the lock and turn it  
counterclockwise (left) for the driver’s side and  
clockwise (right) for the passenger’s side.  
2. Close the door.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When you want to open a rear door when the  
security lock is on, do the following:  
Liftgate  
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry  
transmitter, the power door lock switch, or by  
lifting the rear door manual lock.  
{CAUTION:  
2. Open the door from the outside.  
It can be dangerous to drive with the  
liftgate open because carbon monoxide  
(CO) gas can come into your vehicle.  
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause  
unconsciousness and even death. If you  
must drive with the liftgate open or if  
electrical wiring or other cable  
connections must pass through the  
seal between the body and the liftgate:  
Make sure all other windows are shut.  
Turn the fan on your heating or  
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the  
following:  
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.  
2. Insert the key into the lock and turn it  
clockwise (right) for the driver’s side  
and counterclockwise (left) for the  
passenger’s side.  
Lockout Protection  
If you press the power door lock switch when the  
key is in the ignition and any door is open, all  
the doors will lock and then the driver’s door will  
unlock. Be sure to remove the key from the ignition  
when locking your vehicle.  
cooling system to its highest speed  
and select the control setting that will  
force outside air into your vehicle. See  
If you have air outlets on or under the  
instrument panel, open them all the  
way. See Engine Exhaust on page 123.  
If the remote keyless entry transmitter is used  
to lock the doors while the key is in the ignition,  
a chime will sound three times. All doors will  
then lock.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use your remote keyless entry transmitter or  
power door lock switches to unlock the liftgate.  
To open the liftgate, lift the handle located in the  
center of the liftgate.  
Windows  
{CAUTION:  
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets  
in a vehicle with the windows closed is  
dangerous. They can be overcome by  
the extreme heat and suffer permanent  
injuries or even death from heat stroke.  
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a  
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the  
windows closed in warm or hot weather.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Windows  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
{CAUTION:  
When there are children in the rear seat  
use the window lockout button to prevent  
unintentional operation of the windows.  
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets  
in a vehicle with the windows closed is  
dangerous. They can be overcome from  
extreme heat in warm or hot weather and  
suffer permanent injuries or even death  
from heat stroke.  
The window switches  
are located on each  
side of the shift lever  
on the center console.  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the  
ignition key is dangerous for many  
reasons, children or others could be badly  
injured or even killed. They could operate  
the power windows or other controls or  
even make the vehicle move. The windows  
will function with the keys in the ignition  
and they could be seriously injured or  
killed if caught in the path of a closing  
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle  
with children.  
To lower a window, press the switch down.  
To raise a window, pull the switch up.  
The power windows operate when the ignition  
is in RUN or ACC.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A window switch is also located on each rear  
door. Press the bottom of the switch to lower the  
window. Press the top of the switch to raise  
the window.  
Window Lockout  
The driver’s window switches also include a lockout  
switch. Press the left side of the switch to prevent  
rear passengers from using their window switches.  
The driver can still control all the windows with the  
lockout on. Press the right side of the window  
lockout switch to return to normal window  
operation.  
Express-Down Window  
The driver’s window switch has an express-down  
feature that is labeled AUTO. This allows the  
driver’s window to open fully without having  
to continuously press the switch. Press the switch  
to the second position and the driver’s window  
will go all the way down. To stop the window  
from lowering, lift the switch all the way up and  
release it.  
Sun Visors  
To block out glare swing the visors down or to  
the side. The driver’s sun visor can be detached  
from the center mount and slid along the rod  
to block different areas of the front window.  
Visor Vanity Mirrors  
Your vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To change the mode that your vehicle is  
programmed to, do the following:  
Theft-Deterrent Systems  
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some  
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of  
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing  
we put on it can make it impossible to steal.  
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC.  
2. Press the panic alarm button on the  
transmitter slowly four times within  
five seconds.  
3. You must complete one of the following within  
three seconds to change the mode.  
Content Theft-Deterrent  
The remote keyless entry transmitter is used to  
arm/disarm the theft-deterrent system. Your  
vehicle’s theft-deterrent system can be  
programmed to three different modes.  
To select the active arming mode, press the  
lock button on the transmitter.  
To select the passive arming mode, press  
the lock button on the transmitter twice  
within 3 seconds.  
Active Arming: The system will arm when the  
lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter  
is pressed. The system will disarm when the  
unlock button is pressed.  
To select the security system disable mode,  
press the unlock button on the transmitter.  
A chime will sound once the mode has been  
selected.  
Passive Arming: The system will arm itself  
one minute after the ignition is turned off and  
the driver’s door has been opened and closed.  
If the lock button on the transmitter is pressed  
before the minute has passed, the system will  
arm immediately. The system will disarm when  
the unlock button is pressed.  
If you accidentally set off the alarm when  
entering/exiting the vehicle, you can shut it off  
by pressing any button on the remote keyless entry  
transmitter other than the panic alarm button.  
If you hear three horn chirps when you press the  
unlock button on the transmitter, that means the  
vehicle’s alarm was triggered while you were away.  
Security System Disable: The system will  
not arm.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Passlock®  
During normal operation, the security light will go  
off approximately five seconds after the key is  
turned to RUN following an engine start.  
Your vehicle is equipped with the  
Passlock® theft-deterrent system.  
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes,  
wait until the light stops flashing before trying  
to restart the engine. Remember to release the  
key from START as soon as the engine starts.  
This light will come on  
for the theft-deterent  
system.  
If the engine is running and the security light comes  
on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn  
the engine off. However, your Passlock® system  
is not working properly and must be serviced by  
your retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by  
Passlock® at this time. You may also want to  
check the fuses, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers  
on page 409. See your retailer for service. Also,  
see Roadside Assistance Program on page 445 for  
more information.  
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.  
Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is  
turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used  
or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is  
disabled.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ignition Positions  
Starting and Operating Your  
Vehicle  
With the key in the  
ignition switch, you can  
turn it to four different  
positions. A warning  
tone will sound if you  
open the driver’s door  
when the key has not  
been removed from  
the ignition.  
New Vehicle Break-In  
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an  
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in  
the long run if you follow these guidelines:  
Do not drive at any one constant speed,  
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).  
Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid  
downshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.  
Avoid making hard stops for the first  
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time  
the new brake linings are not yet broken in.  
Hard stops with new linings can mean  
premature wear and earlier replacement.  
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time  
you get new brake linings.  
9 (LOCK): This position locks your steering  
column. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only  
be able to remove your key when the ignition is  
turned to LOCK.  
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See  
Towing a Trailer on page 290 for the trailer  
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more  
information.  
Following break-in, engine speed and load can  
be gradually increased.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignition  
switch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shift  
lever is in PARK (P).  
ACC (Accessory): This position operates some  
of your electrical accessories. It unlocks the  
steering wheel and ignition.  
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from  
the ignition switch could cause damage  
or break the key. Use the correct key and turn  
the key only with your hand. Make sure the  
key is all the way in. If it is, turn the steering  
wheel left and right while you turn the key  
hard. If none of this works, then your vehicle  
needs service.  
R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns to  
after you start your engine and release the switch.  
The switch stays in RUN when the engine is  
running. But even when the ignition is not running,  
you can use RUN to operate your electrical  
accessories and to display some warning and  
indicator lights.  
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in  
the ACC or RUN position with the engine off. You  
may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery is  
allowed to drain for an extended period of time.  
{CAUTION:  
If you have a manual transaxle removing  
the key from the ignition switch will lock  
the steering column and result in a loss  
of ability to steer the vehicle. This could  
cause a collision. If you need to turn the  
engine off while the vehicle is moving,  
turn the key to ACC.  
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When  
the engine starts, release the key. The ignition  
switch will return to RUN for normal driving.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Transaxle  
Key In the Ignition  
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it  
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you  
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,  
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s  
door. Always remember to remove your key from  
the ignition and take it with you. This will lock  
your ignition and transaxle. Also, always remember  
to lock the doors.  
The battery could be drained if you leave the  
key in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.  
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it  
has been parked for an extended period of time.  
The shift lever should be in the neutral position and  
the parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to  
the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle will not  
start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down. That  
is a safety feature.  
Starting Procedure  
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn  
the ignition key to START. When the engine  
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will  
go down as your engine gets warm. Do  
not race the engine immediately after starting  
it. Operate the engine and transaxle gently  
to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate  
all moving parts.  
Starting the Engine  
Place the transaxle in the proper gear.  
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled  
Cranking System. This feature assists in  
starting the engine and protects components. If  
the ignition key is turned to the START position,  
and then released when the engine begins  
cranking, the engine will continue cranking for  
a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.  
Automatic Transaxle  
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or  
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start  
in any other position -- this is a safety feature.  
To restart when you are already moving, use  
NEUTRAL (N) only.  
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle  
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into  
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the engine does not start and the key is held  
in START for many seconds, cranking will be  
stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking  
motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this  
system also prevents cranking if the engine is  
already running. Engine cranking can be  
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the  
ACC or LOCK position.  
hold the key in START for up to a maximum of  
15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between  
each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool  
down. When the engine starts, let go of the key  
and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but  
then stops again, do the same thing. This  
clears the extra gasoline from the engine.  
Do not race the engine immediately after  
starting it. Operate the engine and transaxle  
gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all  
moving parts.  
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of  
time, by returning the key to the START position  
immediately after cranking has ended, can  
overheat and damage the cranking motor,  
and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds  
between each try, to allow the cranking motor  
to cool down.  
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with  
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add  
electrical parts or accessories, you could  
change the way the engine operates. Before  
adding electrical equipment, check with  
your retailer. If you do not, your engine might  
not perform properly. Any resulting damage  
would not be covered by your vehicle’s  
warranty.  
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,  
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F  
or 18°C), it could be flooded with too much  
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all  
the way to the floor and holding it there as you  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Coolant Heater  
{CAUTION:  
Your vehicle may have this feature. In very cold  
weather, 0°F (18°C) or colder, the engine coolant  
heater can provide easier starting and better  
fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,  
the coolant heater should be plugged in a  
minimum of four hours prior to starting your  
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use  
of the coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle  
may also have an internal thermostat in the  
plug end of the cord. This will prevent operation of  
the engine coolant heater when the temperature  
is at or above 0°F (18°C) as noted on the cord.  
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded  
outlet could cause an electrical shock.  
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord  
could overheat and cause a fire. You  
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord  
into a properly grounded three-prong  
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not  
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong  
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.  
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater  
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug  
and store the cord as it was before to keep it  
away from moving engine parts. If you do  
not, it could be damaged.  
How long should you keep the coolant heater  
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside  
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some  
other things. Instead of trying to list everything here,  
we ask that you contact your retailer in the area  
where you will be parking your vehicle. The  
dealer/retailer can give you the best advice  
for that particular area.  
1. Turn off the engine.  
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical  
cord. The engine coolant heater cord is  
located near the air cleaner box on the  
passenger side of the engine compartment.  
page 314 for more information on location.  
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded  
110-volt AC outlet.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Transaxle Operation  
{CAUTION:  
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic  
transaxle, the shift lever is located on the console  
between the seats.  
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle  
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)  
with the parking brake firmly set. Your  
vehicle can roll.  
There are several  
different positions for  
the automatic transaxle.  
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine  
is running unless you have to. If you have  
left the engine running, the vehicle can  
move suddenly. You or others could be  
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not  
move, even when you are on fairly level  
ground, always set your parking brake  
and move the shift lever to PARK (P).  
Transaxle) on page 120. If you are pulling  
a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 290.  
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.  
It is the best position to use when you start your  
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)  
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an  
automatic transaxle shift lock control system.  
You have to fully apply your regular brakes first  
and then press the shift lever button before  
you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition  
key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),  
ease pressure on the shift lever and push the  
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you  
maintain brake application. Then press the shift  
lever button and move the shift lever into another  
gear. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 121.  
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does  
not connect with the wheels. To restart when  
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.  
Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is  
being towed.  
{CAUTION:  
Shifting into a drive gear while your  
engine is running at high speed is  
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on  
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move  
very rapidly. You could lose control and  
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a  
drive gear while your engine is running at  
high speed.  
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.  
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your  
vehicle is moving forward could damage the  
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by  
your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after  
your vehicle is stopped.  
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of  
snow, ice or sand without damaging your transaxle,  
Snow on page 276.  
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or  
NEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running  
at high speed may damage the transaxle.  
The repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Be sure the engine is not running  
at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving with  
the automatic transaxle. It provides the best fuel  
economy for your vehicle. If you need more power  
for passing, and you are:  
repetitive types of shifts. You might choose  
INTERMEDIATE (I) instead of DRIVE (D) when  
driving on hilly, winding roads and when towing  
a trailer, so that there is less shifting between  
gears.  
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push  
your accelerator pedal about halfway down.  
LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speed  
more than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actually  
using your brakes. You can use it on very steep  
hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever  
is put in LOW (L), the transaxle will not shift into  
LOW (L) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.  
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push  
your accelerator all the way down.  
Downshifting the transaxle in slippery road  
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”  
under Loss of Control on page 245.  
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the  
vehicle in one place on a hill using only the  
accelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.  
If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When  
stopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parking  
brake to hold the vehicle in place.  
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used  
for normal driving. However, it reduces vehicle  
speed without using your brakes for slight  
downgrades where the vehicle would otherwise  
accelerate due to steepness of grade. If constant  
upshifting or downshifting occurs while driving up  
steep hills, this position can be used to prevent  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you  
let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into  
SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch  
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.  
Manual Transaxle Operation  
Five-Speed  
This is your vehicle’s  
shift pattern.  
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into  
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the same  
way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the  
clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.  
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press  
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,  
press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and  
shift to NEUTRAL.  
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or  
idle your engine.  
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the  
clutch pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up  
on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the  
accelerator pedal.  
Here is how to operate your transaxle:  
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into  
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal  
as you press the accelerator pedal.  
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your  
vehicle is moving forward could damage the  
transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by  
your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after  
your vehicle is stopped.  
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking  
brake, for parking your vehicle.  
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going  
less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a  
complete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),  
put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the  
clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift  
into FIRST (1).  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next  
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let  
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly  
and shift when the light comes on.  
Shift Speeds  
{CAUTION:  
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to  
go on and off if you quickly change the position  
of the accelerator. Ignore the light when you  
downshift.  
If you skip a gear when you downshift,  
you could lose control of your vehicle.  
You could injure yourself or others.  
Do not shift down more than one gear  
at a time when you downshift.  
Notice: If you skip more than one gear when  
you downshift, or if you race the engine  
when you release the clutch pedal while  
downshifting, you could damage the engine,  
clutch, driveshaft, or the transaxle. Do not skip  
gears or race the engine when downshifting.  
Up-Shift Light  
If your vehicle has a  
manual transaxle, you  
may have an up-shift  
light. This light will show  
you when to shift to  
the next higher gear for  
the best fuel economy.  
United States Only  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal  
down and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the  
ignition is on, the brake system warning light will  
come on.  
Parking Brake  
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal  
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you  
can press the release button. Hold the release  
button in as you move the brake lever all the  
way down.  
Make sure to release the parking brake before  
driving the vehicle.  
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on  
can overheat the brake system and cause  
premature wear or damage to brake system  
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully  
released and the brake warning light is  
off before driving.  
The parking brake lever is located to the right of  
the driver’s seat.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you  
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in  
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).  
Shifting Into Park (P)  
(Automatic Transaxle)  
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine  
Running  
{CAUTION:  
It can be dangerous to get out of your  
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in  
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly  
set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left  
the engine running, the vehicle can move  
suddenly. You or others could be injured.  
To be sure your vehicle will not move,  
even when you are on fairly level ground,  
use the steps that follow. If you are  
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer  
on page 290.  
{CAUTION:  
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle  
with the engine running. Your vehicle  
could move suddenly if the shift lever is  
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking  
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the  
vehicle with the engine running, it could  
overheat and even catch fire. You or  
others could be injured. Do not leave  
your vehicle with the engine running.  
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the  
parking brake.  
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine  
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)  
and your parking brake is firmly set before you  
leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into  
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.  
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding  
the button on the shift lever and pushing the  
lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.  
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away  
from PARK (P) without first pushing the button.  
If you can, it means that the shift lever was  
not fully locked into PARK (P).  
Shifting Out of Park (P)  
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift  
lock control system. You have to fully apply your  
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)  
when the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic  
Transaxle Operation on page 114.  
Torque Lock  
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift  
your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight  
of the vehicle may put too much force on the  
parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find  
it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).  
This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock,  
set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)  
properly before you leave the driver’s seat.  
To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)  
(Automatic Transaxle) on page 120.  
To shift out of PARK (P):  
1. Apply the regular brake pedal.  
2. Then press the shift lever button.  
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.  
If you are still unable to shift out of PARK (P):  
1. Fully release the shift lever button.  
2. While holding down the brake pedal,  
press the shift lever button again.  
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever  
out of PARK (P) before you release the parking  
brake.  
3. Move the shift lever to the desired gear.  
If you still cannot move the shift lever from  
PARK (P), consult your dealer.  
If torque lock does occur, you may need to  
have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to  
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl  
in the transaxle, then you will be able to pull  
the shift lever out of PARK (P).  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Shift Interlock By-Pass  
Parking Over Things That Burn  
Use the following steps, if for some reason the  
shifter is not released when you apply the brake,  
or if service or towing requires the car to be  
shifted out of PARK (P) without running the engine.  
1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.  
2. Turn the ignition to the ACC (Accessory)  
position. See Ignition Positions on page 109  
for more information.  
3. Then, move the shift lever into NEUTRAL (N).  
The vehicle can now be started normally.  
Parking Your Vehicle  
(Manual Transaxle)  
Before leaving your vehicle, fully press the clutch  
pedal in, move the shift lever into REVERSE (R),  
and firmly apply the parking brake. Once the  
shift lever has been placed in REVERSE (R)  
with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn  
the ignition key to LOCK, remove the key,  
and release the clutch.  
{CAUTION:  
Things that can burn could touch hot  
exhaust parts under your vehicle and  
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,  
dry grass, or other things that can burn.  
See Manual Transaxle Operation on page 117.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Exhaust  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Your vehicle was damaged when  
driving over high points on the road  
or over road debris.  
Repairs were not done correctly.  
Your vehicle or the exhaust system  
has been modified improperly.  
{CAUTION:  
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the  
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you  
cannot see or smell. It can cause  
unconsciousness and death.  
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into  
your vehicle:  
Drive it only with all the windows  
down to blow out any CO; and  
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.  
You might have exhaust coming in if:  
The exhaust system sounds strange  
or different.  
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.  
Your vehicle was damaged in a  
collision.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Running the Engine While Parked  
{CAUTION:  
It is better not to park with the engine running.  
But if you ever have to, here are some things  
to know.  
It can be dangerous to get out of your  
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in  
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly  
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave  
your vehicle when the engine is running  
unless you have to. If you have left the  
engine running, the vehicle can move  
suddenly. You or others could be injured.  
To be sure your vehicle will not move,  
even when you are on fairly level ground,  
always set the parking brake and move  
the shift lever to PARK (P).  
{CAUTION:  
Idling the engine with the climate control  
system off could allow dangerous exhaust  
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution  
under Engine Exhaust on page 123.  
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let  
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your  
vehicle even if the climate control fan is  
at the highest setting. One place this  
can happen is a garage. Exhaust — with  
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in  
a garage with the engine running.  
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle  
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)  
(Automatic Transaxle) on page 120.  
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.  
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a  
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 290.  
See Winter Driving on page 272.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation  
Mirrors  
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned  
on automatically each time the ignition is started.  
To operate the automatic dimming mirror, do  
the following:  
Automatic Dimming Rearview  
Mirror with OnStar®, Compass  
and Temperature Display  
1. Make sure the indicator light, located to the left  
of the on/off button, is on. If it’s not, press and  
hold the on/off button until the light comes on,  
indicating that the mirror is in automatic  
dimming mode.  
When on, an automatic dimming mirror  
automatically dims to the proper level to  
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.  
The mirror also includes a dual display in the  
upper right corner of the mirror face. The compass  
reading and the outside temperature will both  
appear in the display at the same time.  
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function  
by pressing and holding the on/off button until  
the indicator light turns off.  
Temperature and Compass Display  
P(On/Off): This is the on/off button.  
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly  
to turn the comp/temp display on or off.  
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs  
to be calibrated. See the information following  
on calibration.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, do the  
following:  
Compass Variance  
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the  
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass  
to compensate for compass variance if you live  
outside of zone eight. Under certain circumstances,  
as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will  
be necessary to adjust for compass variance.  
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s  
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not  
adjusted to account for compass variance, your  
compass could give false readings.  
1. Press and hold the on/off button until either a  
flashing °F or °C appears.  
2. Press the button again to change the display  
to the desired unit of measurement. After  
approximately four seconds of inactivity, the  
new unit will be locked in and the display  
will return.  
Compass Calibration  
The compass may need calibration from time  
to time.  
To adjust for compass variance do the following:  
1. Find your current location and variance  
zone number on the following zone map.  
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the  
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,  
push in the on/off button for approximately  
nine seconds or until CAL is displayed.  
The compass can be calibrated by driving the  
vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until  
the display reads a direction, or the word CAL  
disappears.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the Mirror  
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or  
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.  
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror  
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter  
the mirror housing.  
Outside Power Mirrors  
The outside power  
mirror controls are  
located on the driver’s  
side of the vehicle  
next to the shift lever.  
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone  
number appears in the display. The compass  
is now in zone mode.  
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the  
desired zone number appears in the display.  
Release the button. After approximately four  
seconds of inactivity, the new zone number  
will be locked in and the comp/temp display  
will return.  
Move the selector switch to the left or right to  
choose the mirror to be adjusted; then press the  
four-way control pad to adjust the direction of  
the mirror.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OnStar® System  
Outside Convex Mirror  
{CAUTION:  
A convex mirror can make things (like  
other vehicles) look farther away than  
they really are. If you cut too sharply into  
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on  
your right. Check your inside mirror or  
glance over your shoulder before  
changing lanes.  
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and  
live advisors to provide you with a wide range of  
safety, security, information, and convenience  
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is  
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®  
Emergency advisors who can request emergency  
services be sent to your location. If you lock  
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at  
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to  
unlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance,  
press the OnStar® button and they can contact  
Roadside Service for you.  
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex  
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen  
from the driver’s seat. It also makes things appear  
farther away than they really are.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the  
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancel  
your OnStar® service at any time by contacting  
OnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®  
Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms and  
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®  
Subscriber glove box literature. For more  
information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact  
OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or  
TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® button  
to speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day,  
7 days a week.  
Not all OnStar® features are available on all  
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to  
provide the services described below, or for a  
full description of OnStar® services and system  
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in  
your glove box or visit onstar.com.  
For more information, press the OnStar® button to  
speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services  
(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle  
Location Assistance) may not be available  
until you register with OnStar®.  
Available Services with  
Safe & Sound® Plan  
Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment  
Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)  
(If equipped)  
Link to Emergency Services  
Roadside Assistance  
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance  
AccidentAssist  
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert  
OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics  
GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics  
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with  
30 complimentary minutes  
OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)  
OnStar® Services  
For new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & Sound  
Plan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan is  
included for one year from the date of purchase.  
You can extend this plan beyond the first year,  
or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar® Virtual Advisor  
Available Services included with  
Directions & Connections® Plan  
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®  
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to  
access location-based weather, local traffic reports,  
and stock quotes. By pressing the phone button  
and giving a few simple voice commands, you can  
browse through the various topics. See the OnStar®  
Owners Guide for more information (Only available  
in the continental U.S.).  
All Safe and Sound Plan Services  
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or  
OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)  
RideAssist  
Information and Convenience Services  
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling  
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls  
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible  
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls  
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is  
fully integrated into the vehicle, and can be  
used with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.  
Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a  
Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a  
Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending  
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®  
Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit  
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak  
with an OnStar® advisor by pressing the  
OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR  
(1-888-466-7827).  
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that  
can be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-Free  
page 223 for more information.  
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the  
button for a few seconds and give the command  
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®  
Hands-Free Calling feature.  
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used  
to dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to  
dial phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s  
Guide for more information.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar® service. Not all services are available  
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed  
areas, or at all times.  
OnStar® service that involves location information  
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS  
satellite signals are unobstructed and available  
in that place as well.  
How OnStar® Service Works  
In order to provide you with OnStar® services,  
your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability  
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.  
This information is automatically sent to an  
OnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®  
button press, Emergency button press or if  
your airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicle  
information usually includes your GPS location  
and, in the event of a crash, additional information  
regarding the accident that your vehicle has  
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which  
your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual  
Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,  
your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPS  
location so that we can provide you with  
location-based services.  
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle is  
in a place where OnStar® has an agreement with a  
wireless service provider for service in that area.  
OnStar® service also cannot work unless you are  
in a place where the wireless service provider  
OnStar® has hired for that area has coverage,  
network capacity and reception when the service is  
needed, and technology that is compatible with the  
Your vehicle must have a working electrical  
system (including adequate battery power) for the  
OnStar® equipment to operate. There are other  
problems OnStar® cannot control that may prevent  
OnStar® from providing OnStar® service to you  
at any particular time or place. Some examples are  
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an  
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather  
or wireless phone network congestion.  
Your Responsibility  
You may need to increase the volume of your radio  
to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next to the  
OnStar® buttons is red, this means that your system  
is not functioning properly and should be checked  
by your dealer/retailer. If the light appears clear (no  
light is appearing), your OnStar® subscription has  
expired. You can always press the OnStar® button  
to confirm that your OnStar® equipment is active.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Floor Console Storage Area  
Storage Areas  
Your vehicle may have a floor console storage  
area. Push the button to open.  
Glove Box  
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.  
Center Console Storage Area  
Cupholder(s)  
Your vehicle has a center console storage area.  
To access, slide the cover back towards the rear  
of the vehicle. It is equipped with two accessory  
power outlets. One is located inside the storage  
area and another hidden under the cupholders.  
There is a hole in the storage area for a cellphone  
wire to be routed through.  
Your vehicle has a removable cupholder liner  
and cupholder located inside the center console  
storage area. To access, pull the cover towards  
the rear of the vehicle. To remove the liner, pull it  
out of the cupholder. To replace, push the liner  
back in. To remove the cupholder, push the tab  
in near the passenger’s seat and pull straight  
up. To replace, slide the two tabs at the rear of  
the cupholder into the slots at the rear of the  
center console and push the cupholder gently  
into place. There is additional storage underneath  
the cupholders. There are two more cupholders  
located at rear of the center console. Push  
the button to access.  
Cargo Area  
Your vehicle has a cargo area organizer, which  
is located in the rear of the vehicle. This storage  
space is designed to hold small items and includes  
integrated storage bins.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use the following procedure to access and  
assemble the rear cargo organizer.  
1. Pull up on the latch of the rear panel lid of the  
cargo organizer to open it.  
3. Turn the end panels forward and snap them  
into the rear panel lid.  
2. Lift the front of the cargo organizer and fold  
out the end panels.  
4. Pull the center divider out from the rear  
panel lid.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Roof Rack System  
5. Turn the center divider rearward and snap it  
into the panel lid.  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a roof rack  
system. To adjust the crossrails, turn both knobs  
on each side of the crossrail counterclockwise  
until it moves freely. Once the crossrail is in place,  
turn both knobs on each of side of the crossrail  
clockwise until it is secure.  
6. Reverse the above steps to stow the dividers  
and close the cargo organizer.  
Push firmly on the rear panel lid to engage  
the latch of the organizer.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier  
that weighs more than 100 lbs (45 kg) or  
hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle  
may damage your vehicle. Load cargo so  
that it rests on the slats as far forward  
as possible and against the side rails,  
making sure to fasten it securely.  
{CAUTION:  
If you try to carry something on top of  
your vehicle that is longer or wider than  
the luggage carrier — like paneling,  
plywood, a mattress and so forth — the  
wind can catch it as you drive along. This  
can cause you to lose control. What you  
are carrying could be violently torn off,  
and this could cause you or other drivers  
to have a collision, and of course damage  
your vehicle. You may be able to carry  
something like this inside. But, never  
carry something longer or wider than the  
luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.  
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity  
when loading your vehicle. For more information  
on vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading Your  
Vehicle on page 279.  
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are  
driving, check frequently to ensure your cargo  
is securely fastened.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To stop the sunroof before it is completely open,  
press the switch rearward again. The sunshade  
cannot be closed with the sunroof open. To close  
the sunroof, press forward on the switch until it  
stops. The sunshade must be manually closed.  
Sunroof  
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the controls to  
operate it are located on the headliner above the  
rearview mirror. The ignition must be in RUN  
or ACC to operate the sunroof. See Ignition  
Positions on page 109.  
To put the sunroof in the vent position, pull down  
on the front of the switch. Push up on the front  
of the switch to close it. The sunshade must  
be manually opened and closed when the  
sunroof is in the vent position.  
To express-open the  
sunroof glass panel and  
sunshade, press the  
switch rearward  
and release it.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 3  
Instrument Panel  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instrument Panel Overview  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:  
A. Air Outlets. See Climate Control System on  
K. Fog Lamp Button (If Equipped) or Traction  
page 155.  
Control System Button (If Equipped). See Fog  
System (TCS) on page 238.  
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn  
L. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on  
C. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Control on  
page 182.  
page 146.  
M. Hood Release. See Hood Release on  
D. Horn. See Horn on page 142.  
page 313.  
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument  
N. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 142.  
Panel Cluster on page 162.  
O. Power Mirror Control. See Outside Power  
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio  
Mirrors on page 127.  
P. Power Window Switches. See Power Windows  
G. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield  
on page 105.  
Wipers on page 144.  
Q. Automatic Transaxle Shift Lever. See Automatic  
H. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. See  
Transaxle Operation on page 114.  
R. Heated Seats Buttons or Footwell Lamps  
(If Equipped). See Heated Seats on page 11 or  
Footwell Lamps on page 153.  
I. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard  
Warning Flashers on page 142.  
J. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. See  
S. Climate Control. See Climate Control System  
on page 155.  
T. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 132.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hazard Warning Flashers  
Tilt Wheel  
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the  
police and others that you have a problem. The  
front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on  
and off.  
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel which allows you to  
adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can  
raise it to the highest level to give your legs more  
room when you exit and enter the vehicle.  
The hazard warning  
flasher button is located  
in the center of the  
instrument panel.  
The lever that allows  
you to tilt the steering  
wheel is located on  
the left side of the  
steering column.  
Press the button to make the front and rear turn  
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button  
again to turn the flashers off.  
While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn  
signals do not work.  
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what  
position the key is in, and even if the key is not  
in the ignition switch.  
To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and push  
the lever down. Then, move the wheel to a  
comfortable position and pull the lever up firmly  
to lock the column in place.  
Horn  
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering  
wheel pad to sound the horn.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever  
Turn and Lane-Change Signals  
The turn signal has one upward (for right) and  
one downward (for left) positions. These positions  
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.  
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or  
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will  
return automatically.  
An arrow on the  
instrument panel  
cluster will flash in the  
direction of the turn  
or lane change.  
The lever on the left side of the steering column  
includes the following:  
G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See  
O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps on  
page 149.  
2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.  
on page 144.  
Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass on  
page 144.  
AUTO Automatic Headlamps. See Automatic  
Headlamp System on page 151.  
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever  
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you  
complete the lane change. The lever will return  
by itself when you release it.  
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the  
arrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned  
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.  
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an  
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you  
signal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit  
Breakers on page 409 and for burned-out bulbs.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer  
Windshield Wipers  
To change the headlamps from low beam to  
high or high beam to low, pull the turn signal lever  
all the way towards you. Then release it.  
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades  
before using them. If the wiper blades are frozen to  
the windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If the  
blades do become damaged, install new blades  
or blade inserts. See Windshield Wiper Blade  
Replacement on page 364.  
When the high beams  
are on, this light on  
the instrument panel  
cluster will also be on.  
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.  
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools  
down. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an  
overload.  
Flash-to-Pass  
This feature lets you use your high-beam  
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you  
that you want to pass.  
To flash the high beams from low beam, pull  
the turn signal/multifunction lever all the way  
towards you. Then release it.  
United States  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
band with the arrow pointing to the  
numbers (1, 2, or 3). Select 3 for the most  
frequent movement; select 1 for the least frequent.  
LO or OO(Low): Move the lever to this  
position for slow, steady wiping cycles.  
HI or OOOO(High): Move the lever to this  
position for rapid wiping cycles.  
Windshield Washer  
Canada  
The lever on the right side of the steering column  
operates the windshield wipers. Push up or  
pull down on the lever to place it in one of the  
following positions.  
{CAUTION:  
In freezing weather, do not use your  
washer until the windshield is warmed.  
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice  
on the windshield, blocking your vision.  
MIST or 8(Mist): Pull the lever down and  
release it for a single wiping cycle. The lever will  
return to its original position. For more cycles, hold  
the lever down before releasing it.  
OFF or 9(Off): Move the lever to this position  
to turn off the wipers.  
Pull the windshield wiper lever toward you to  
operate the windshield wipers. Washer fluid will  
squirt onto the windshield and the wipers will  
run for a few cycles to clear the windshield.  
For more wash cycles, pull the lever toward  
you and hold it there.  
INT or &(Intermittent): Move the lever to this  
position to set a delay between wipes. To set for a  
shorter or longer delay between wipes, turn the  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rear Window Wiper/Washer  
Cruise Control  
The band on the wiper lever with the smaller  
arrow operates the rear wiper/washer.  
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed  
of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without  
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can  
really help on long trips. Cruise control does not  
work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).  
9(Off): Turn the band to this position to turn off  
the rear wiper.  
Z (Rear Wiper): Turn the band with the smaller  
arrow to this position to turn on the rear wiper.  
To set for a shorter or longer delay between wipes,  
turn the other band with the larger arrow pointing  
to the numbers (1, 2, or 3). Select 3 for the  
most frequent movement; select 1 for the least  
frequent. The band with the arrow pointing to  
the numbers (1, 2, or 3) will affect both the front  
and rear wipers if they are on at the same time.  
{CAUTION:  
Cruise control can be dangerous where  
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.  
So, do not use your cruise control on  
winding roads or in heavy traffic.  
Cruise control can be dangerous on  
slippery roads. On such roads, fast  
changes in tire traction can cause  
excessive wheel slip, and you could  
lose control. Do not use cruise control  
on slippery roads.  
Y (Wash): Turn and hold the band in this  
position to spray washer fluid on the rear window.  
The rear wiper will also come on. Release the  
band when enough fluid has been sprayed on the  
window. The rear wiper will run a few additional  
times after you release it.  
The rear window washer uses the same fluid  
bottle as the windshield washer. However, the  
rear window washer will run out of fluid before the  
windshield washer. If you can wash your windshield  
but not your rear window, check the fluid level.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Cruise Control  
J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruise  
control system on and off. There is a indicator  
light on the button that will come on when cruise  
control is active.  
{CAUTION:  
RES+ (Resume): Press this button to resume a  
set speed and to accelerate the speed.  
If you leave your cruise control on when  
you are not using cruise, you might hit a  
button and go into cruise when you do not  
want to. You could be startled and even  
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch  
off until you want to use cruise control.  
SET(Set): Press this button to set a speed and  
to decrease the speed.  
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel  
cruise control.  
To set a speed do the following:  
The cruise control  
buttons are located on  
the steering wheel.  
1. Press the on/off symbol to turn cruise control  
on. The indicator light on the button will  
come on.  
2. Get to the speed you want.  
3. Press the SETbutton and release it.  
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.  
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control  
shuts off.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resuming a Set Speed  
Reducing Speed While Using  
Cruise Control  
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired  
speed and then you apply the brakes. This  
will disengage the cruise control. The indicator  
light on the cruise control button will go out when  
the cruise is no longer engaged. To return to  
the previously set speed, press the RES+ button  
briefly when the vehicle has reached a speed  
of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.  
If the cruise control system is already engaged,  
Push and hold the SETbutton until you reach  
the lower speed you want, then release it.  
To slow down in very small amounts, push the  
SETbutton briefly. Each time you do this, you  
will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.  
This will take you back up to your previously  
selected speed and stay there.  
Passing Another Vehicle While Using  
Cruise Control  
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your  
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal,  
the vehicle will slow down to the cruise control  
speed you set earlier.  
Increasing Speed While Using  
Cruise Control  
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.  
Disengage the cruise control, but do not turn  
it off.  
Using Cruise Control on Hills  
How well your cruise control will work on  
hills depends upon your speed, load, and the  
steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,  
you may have to step on the accelerator pedal  
to maintain the vehicle’s speed.  
If the cruise control system is already  
engaged, press the RES+ button. Hold it there  
until you get up to the speed you want, and  
then release the button. To increase your  
speed in very small amounts, press the RES+  
button briefly and then release it. Each time  
you do this, the vehicle will go about  
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When going downhill, you may have to brake  
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed  
down. Of course, applying the brakes ends  
cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too  
much trouble and do not use cruise control  
on steep hills.  
Headlamps  
The exterior lamp control is located on the turn  
signal/multifunction lever.  
O(Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control  
with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.  
Ending Cruise Control  
The exterior lamp control has the following  
three positions:  
There are three ways to disengage the  
cruise control:  
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this  
position to put the headlamps in automatic mode.  
AUTO mode will turn the exterior lamps on  
and off depending upon how much light is  
available outside of the vehicle.  
Step lightly on the brake pedal or clutch; when  
cruise control disengages, the indicator light  
on the cruise control button will go out.  
Press the on/off button, this will turn off the  
cruise control system.  
Press the cancel button.  
Erasing Speed Memory  
When you turn off the cruise control or the  
ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is  
erased.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this  
position to turn on the parking lamps together with  
the following:  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier  
for others to see the front of your vehicle during  
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different  
driving conditions, but they can be especially  
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before  
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps  
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.  
Sidemarker Lamps  
Taillamps  
License Plate Lamps  
Instrument Panel Lights  
The DRL system will make your low-beam  
headlamps come on at a reduced brightness in  
daylight when the following conditions are met:  
53(Headlamps): Turning the control to this  
position turns on the headlamps, together with the  
previously listed lamps and lights.  
The ignition is on,  
Lamps On Reminder  
the exterior lamp band is in AUTO,  
the transaxle is not in PARK (P),  
the light sensor determines it is daytime, and  
the parking brake is released.  
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off  
and the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the DRL are on, the low-beam headlamps  
will be on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps,  
sidemarker and other lamps will not be on.  
The instrument panel will not be lit up either.  
Automatic Headlamp System  
When it is dark enough outside, the headlamps  
will come on automatically.  
When you turn the exterior lamp band to  
the headlamp position, your regular headlamps  
will come on. The other lamps that come on with  
your headlamps will also come on.  
Your vehicle has a light  
sensor located on top of  
the instrument panel.  
Make sure it is not  
covered, or the  
headlamps will be  
on when you don’t  
need them.  
When you turn off the headlamps, the regular  
lamps will go off, and your low-beam headlamps  
will come on to the reduced brightness.  
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, move the  
shift lever to PARK (P). The DRL will stay off until  
you move the shift lever out of PARK (P). To  
override the DRL on manual transaxle vehicles,  
you must set the parking brake while the ignition  
is off and then start your vehicle. The DRL will stay  
off until you release the parking brake.  
The system may also turn on the headlamps when  
driving through a parking garage or tunnel.  
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the  
regular headlamp system when you need it.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fog Lamps  
Interior Lamps  
If your vehicle has this feature, use your fog lamps  
for better visibility in foggy or misty conditions.  
The liftgate lamps are located on the bottom left  
and right corner of the liftgate. They will come  
on when the liftgate or any door is opened. The  
liftgate lamps can be controlled by the dome lamp  
switch. See Dome Lamp on page 153.  
The button for your fog  
lamps is located on  
the instrument panel  
above the radio.  
Instrument Panel Brightness  
This feature controls the brightness of the  
instrument panel lights.  
The thumbwheel for  
this feature is located  
on the center of the  
instrument panel.  
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on or off.  
When using fog lamps, the parking lamps or  
low-beam headlamps must be on.  
A light on the button will come on when the fog  
lamps are on. Fog lamps will go off whenever  
the high-beam headlamps are turned on. When  
the high-beam headlamps are turned off, the  
fog lamps will come on again.  
Turn the thumbwheel to the right to brighten the  
lights or to the left to dim them.  
Some localities have laws that require the  
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dome Lamp  
Map Lamps  
The lamps are located on the headliner above the  
rearview mirror. To turn the lamps on, press  
the lens. Press the lens again to turn them off.  
The dome lamp switch has three positions.  
* (Off): The lamp will not come on as long as  
the switch is in this position.  
Footwell Lamps  
1 (Automatic): The lamp will come on when a  
Your vehicle may have two footwell lamps.  
These lights are located under the driver and  
passenger seats. The switches are located on  
the instrument panel under the climate controls.  
door is opened. See Entry Lighting on page 153.  
+ (On): The lamp will stay on as long as  
the switch is in this position.  
Entry Lighting  
If the dome lamp is in the automatic position,  
the lamps inside your vehicle will come on when  
any door is opened. In addition, the lights will  
come on when the remote keyless entry unlock  
button is pressed. It will stay on for 20 seconds or  
until a door is opened. After the door is opened  
the lights will remain on and stay on for  
20 seconds after the doors are closed, or until  
you put the key in the ignition and turn the key  
to RUN. The lights will then gradually dim until  
it is no longer lit.  
There are two different colors of light that can  
be selected. Press the upper part of the button  
for blue light and press the bottom part of  
the button for amber light. Each light will  
illuminate the front and rear area of the seat.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Certain electrical accessories may not be  
compatible with the accessory power outlet and  
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.  
If you experience a problem, see your retailer for  
additional information on the accessory  
power outlet.  
Battery Run-Down Protection  
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery saver  
feature designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.  
When any interior lamp is left on and the  
ignition is turned off, the battery rundown  
protection system will automatically turn the lamp  
off after 20 minutes. This will avoid draining  
the battery.  
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to  
your vehicle may damage it or keep other  
components from working as they should.  
The repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Check with your retailer before  
adding electrical equipment.  
Accessory Power Outlet(s)  
The accessory power outlets can be used to  
connect electrical equipment such as a cellular  
phone or CB radio.  
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to  
follow the installation instructions included with  
the equipment.  
The accessory power outlets are located on the  
instrument panel near the climate controls, on the  
rear of the center console, and also inside the  
console under the cupholders.  
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can  
cause damage not covered by your warranty.  
Do not hang any type of accessory or  
accessory bracket from the plug because the  
power outlets are designed for accessory  
power plugs only.  
To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in  
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.  
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for  
extended periods will drain the battery. Always  
turn off electrical equipment when not in use  
and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the  
maximum 20 ampere rating.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cigarette Lighter  
Climate Controls  
Your vehicle may have a cigarette lighter. To use  
the lighter, located on the instrument panel below  
the climate controls, push it in all the way and let  
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.  
Climate Control System  
With this system you can control the heating,  
cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.  
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it  
is heating does not let the lighter back  
away from the heating element when it is hot.  
Damage from overheating can occur to the  
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be  
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while  
it is heating.  
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other  
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes  
or other smoking materials could ignite  
them and possibly damage your vehicle.  
Never put flammable items in the ashtray.  
Operation  
To change the current mode, use the right knob to  
select one of the following:  
H(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument  
panel outlets.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
some airflow noticeable from the various outlets  
when driving, even with the fan in the off position.  
This is to ensure some fresh air is always  
available in the vehicle.  
)(Bi-Level): This mode directs air to the  
instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets.  
Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and  
warmer air to the floor outlets.  
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob  
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise  
to decrease the temperature inside your vehicle.  
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to  
the floor outlets with some air directed to the  
windshield.  
@(Recirculate): Press this button to toggle  
between recirculate and outside air modes. The  
indicator light turns on when recirculate mode is  
selected. This mode can be used to prevent  
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle  
or to help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle  
more quickly. Avoid using the recirculate mode on  
during high periods of humidity or cool outside  
temperatures since this may result in increased  
window fogging. If window fogging is experienced,  
select the defrost mode.  
When you select this mode, the system will turn  
recirculation mode off and run the air conditioning  
compressor unless the outside air is at or below  
freezing. Recirculation mode cannot be selected  
while in floor mode. This helps prevent window  
fogging and moisture building up within the cabin.  
The right knob can also be used to select defog or  
defrost mode. See “Defogging and Defrosting”  
later in this section.  
A(Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise to increase  
the fan speed or counterclockwise to decrease  
the fan speed. To turn the fan off, turn the left knob  
all the way counterclockwise. In any setting  
other than off, the fan will run continuously with  
the ignition on. The fan must be turned on to run  
the air conditioning compressor. There will be  
Recirculation mode is not available in floor, defog,  
or defrost modes and will shut off automatically and  
change to outside air until a mode other than floor,  
defog, or defrost is selected. This helps prevent  
window fogging and moisture building up within  
the cabin.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to  
turn the air conditioning system on or off. When  
this button is pressed, an indicator light above  
the button will come on to let you know the  
air conditioning is activated. Air conditioning  
can be selected in any mode as long as the  
fan is on in any speed position.  
Defogging and Defrosting  
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high  
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window  
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control  
system is used properly. There are two modes to  
clear fog or frost from your windshield and side  
windows. Use the defog mode to clear the windows  
of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use  
the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the  
windshield more quickly. For best results, clear all  
snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.  
On hot days, activate the air conditioning system,  
select maximum fan speed and the coldest  
temperature setting. Open the windows long  
enough to let the hot inside air escape, then close  
them. This helps reduce the time it takes for your  
vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to  
operate more efficiently. Adjust fan speed and  
temperature setting as required to achieve comfort.  
Turn the right knob to select the defog or  
defrost mode.  
-(Defog): This mode directs air to the  
windshield, side window outlets and floor outlets.  
When you select this mode, the system will turn  
recirculation mode off and run the air conditioning  
compressor unless the outside air is at or below  
freezing. Recirculation mode cannot be selected  
while in defog mode. This helps prevent window  
fogging and moisture building up within the cabin.  
To defog the windows faster, turn the temperature  
knob clockwise to the warmest setting.  
The air conditioning system removes moisture  
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a  
small amount of water dripping underneath your  
vehicle while idling or after turning off the  
engine. This is normal.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to  
the windshield, with some air directed to the side  
window outlets and the floor outlets. When you  
select this mode, the system will turn recirculation  
mode off automatically and will run the air  
conditioning compressor unless the outside air is  
at or below freezing. Recirculation mode cannot be  
selected while in defrost mode. This helps prevent  
window fogging and moisture building up within  
the cabin. To defrost the windows faster, turn the  
temperature knob clockwise to the warmest setting.  
<(Rear Window Defogger): Press the button to  
turn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator  
light above the button will come on to let you know  
that the rear window defogger is activated.  
The rear window defogger will stay on for  
approximately 15 minutes after the button is  
pressed, unless the ignition is turned to ACC or  
LOCK. If turned on again, the defogger will only run  
for approximately seven minutes before turning off.  
The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the  
button again or by turning off the engine.  
Rear Window Defogger  
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the  
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could  
cut or damage the warming grid, and the  
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.  
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,  
tape, a decal or anything similar to the  
defogger grid.  
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to  
remove fog from the rear window.  
The rear window defogger will only work when the  
ignition is in RUN.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The filter should be replaced as part of routine  
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled  
Maintenance on page 420 for replacement  
intervals. To find out what type of filter to use,  
on page 434.  
Outlet Adjustment  
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to  
change the direction of the airflow.  
Operation Tips  
Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the  
air inlets at the base of the vehicle that may  
block the flow of air into your vehicle.  
The passenger compartment air filter can be  
accessed from under the hood.  
Do not use any non-GM approved hood  
deflectors that could adversely affect the  
performance of the system.  
1. Remove the push  
pins from the air  
filter access panel.  
Keep the path under the front seats clear of  
objects to help circulate the air inside of  
your vehicle more effectively.  
Passenger Compartment Air Filter  
The passenger compartment air is routed through  
a passenger compartment filter. The filter  
removes certain particles from the air, including  
pollen and dust particles. Reductions in airflow,  
which may occur more quickly in dusty areas,  
indicate that the filter needs to be replaced.  
2. Remove the air filter access panel.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Remove the air filter from the housing by  
pressing the tab on the inboard side of  
the housing.  
4. Remove the filter by sliding it out of  
the housing.  
5. Install the new air filter.  
When installing a new air filter make sure the  
AIR FLOW arrow is pointing rearward.  
6. Reinstall the air filter access panel.  
7. Reinstall the air filter access panel push pins.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a  
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often  
gages and warning lights work together to let you  
know when there is a problem with your vehicle.  
Warning Lights, Gages,  
and Indicators  
This part describes the warning lights and gages on  
your vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.  
When one of the warning lights comes on and  
stays on as you are driving, or when one of the  
gages shows there may be a problem, check  
the section that tells you what to do about  
it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to  
do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.  
So please get to know your vehicle’s warning  
lights and gages. They can be a big help.  
Warning lights and gages can signal that something  
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to  
cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying  
attention to the warning lights and gages could also  
save you or others from injury.  
Warning lights come on when there may be or is  
a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.  
As the details show on the next few pages, some  
warning lights come on briefly when you start  
the engine just to let you know they are working.  
If you are familiar with this section, you should  
not be alarmed when this happens.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Panel Cluster  
The instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will know  
how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to  
know to drive safely and economically.  
United States version shown, Canada similar  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Speedometer and Odometer  
Trip Odometer  
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in  
both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per  
hour (km/h).  
Your trip odometer is located on the instrument  
panel and shows how far your vehicle has been  
driven since the trip odometer was last reset.  
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold  
the trip/reset button on the speedometer for about  
two seconds. Press the trip/reset button to switch  
between the trip odometer and odometer.  
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has  
been driven, in either miles or kilometers.  
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.  
If ERROR is displayed, this indicates someone  
has probably tampered with the odometer and the  
reading may not be accurate. You may wonder  
what happens if your vehicle needs a new  
odometer installed. The new one can be set to the  
mileage total of the old odometer, then that will be  
done. If not, it will be set at zero and a label must  
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage  
reading when the new odometer was installed.  
If the mileage is unknown, the label should then  
indicate “previous mileage unknown”.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: For the VUE Redline, if you operate  
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded  
warning area, your vehicle could be damaged,  
and the damages would not be covered by  
your warranty. Do not operate the engine with  
the tachometer in the shaded warning area.  
Tachometer  
Safety Belt Reminder Light  
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a  
chime will come on for several seconds to remind  
people to fasten their safety belts, unless the  
driver’s safety belt is already buckled.  
The safety belt light will  
also come on and stay  
on for several seconds,  
then it will flash for  
several more.  
The tachometer displays the engine speed in  
revolutions per minute (rpm).  
Notice: If you operate the engine above  
6,900 rpm, your vehicle could be damaged,  
and the damages would not be covered by your  
warranty. Do not operate the engine with the  
tachometer above 6,900 rpm.  
This chime and light will be repeated if the driver  
remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.  
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither  
the chime nor the light will come on.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Passenger Safety Belt  
Reminder Light  
Airbag Readiness Light  
There is an airbag readiness light on the  
instrument panel cluster, which shows the  
airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag’s  
electrical system for malfunctions. The light  
tells you if there is an electrical problem.  
The system check includes the airbag sensor,  
the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash  
sensing and diagnostic module. For more  
information on the airbag system, see Airbag  
System on page 71.  
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or  
START, a chime will sound for several seconds to  
remind the front passenger to buckle their safety  
belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag  
is enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on  
page 82 for more information. The passenger  
safety belt light will also come on and stay on for  
several seconds, then it will flash for several more.  
This chime and light  
will be repeated if the  
passenger remains  
unbuckled and  
This light will come on  
when you start your  
vehicle, and it will flash  
for a few seconds.  
Then the light should go  
out. This means the  
system is ready.  
the vehicle is in motion.  
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither  
the chime nor the light will come on.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you  
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,  
your airbag system may not work properly.  
Have your vehicle serviced right away.  
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator  
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.  
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag  
status indicator.  
{CAUTION:  
If the airbag readiness light stays on after  
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag  
system may not be working properly. The  
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in  
a crash, or they could even inflate without  
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself  
or others, have your vehicle serviced right  
away if the airbag readiness light stays on  
after you start your vehicle.  
United States  
Canada  
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,  
the passenger airbag status indicator will light  
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,  
for several seconds as a system check. Then,  
after several more seconds, the status indicator  
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on  
or off symbol to let you know the status of the  
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.  
The airbag readiness light should flash for a  
few seconds when you turn the ignition key to  
RUN. If the light does not come on then, have it  
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is  
a problem.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the  
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that  
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled  
(may inflate).  
If your vehicle has a rear seat that will  
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,  
a label on your sun visor says, “Never put a  
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because  
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the  
airbag deploys.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
If the on indicator comes on when you have  
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the  
right front passenger’s seat, it means that  
the passenger sensing system has not  
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.  
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can  
be seriously injured or killed if the right  
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is  
because the back of the rear-facing child  
restraint would be very close to the  
Even though the passenger sensing  
system is designed to turn off the right  
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the  
system detects a rear-facing child restraint,  
no system is fail-safe, and no one can  
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy  
under some unusual circumstance, even  
though it is turned off. We recommend that  
rear-facing child restraints be secured in  
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.  
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing  
child restraint in the right front passenger’s  
seat if the airbag is turned on.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that  
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,  
never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint  
in the right front passenger seat unless the  
passenger airbag status indicator shows off  
and the airbag is off. Here is why:  
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on  
the airbag status indicator, it means that the  
passenger sensing system has turned off the right  
front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger  
Sensing System on page 82 for more on this,  
including important safety information.  
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights  
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there  
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger  
sensing system. See your retailer for service.  
{CAUTION:  
Even though the passenger sensing  
system is designed to turn off the  
{CAUTION:  
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system  
detects a rear-facing child restraint,  
no system is fail-safe, and no one can  
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy  
under some unusual circumstance, even  
though it is turned off. We recommend that  
rear-facing child restraints be transported  
in vehicles with a rear seat that will  
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,  
whenever possible.  
If the off indicator and the airbag  
readiness light ever come on together, it  
means that something may be wrong with  
the airbag system. If this ever happens,  
have the vehicle serviced promptly,  
because an adult-size person sitting in the  
right front passenger seat may not have  
the protection of the frontal airbag. See  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery Warning Light  
Up-Shift Light  
Your vehicle may have an up-shift light. When  
this light comes on, you should shift to the  
next higher gear if weather, road, and traffic  
conditions allow you to.  
The battery warning light  
will come on briefly as a  
check, when you turn on  
the ignition. Then it  
should go out when the  
engine is started.  
This light is located in  
your instrument panel  
cluster under your  
temperature gage.  
If the light does not come on when you start your  
vehicle, have your vehicle serviced right away. This  
condition may indicate your battery warning light is  
not functioning properly. If this light comes on while  
you are driving, be sure to turn off accessories such  
as the radio and climate control system. Have your  
vehicle serviced right away.  
United States Only  
See Manual Transaxle Operation on page 117 for  
more information.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
fully. A chime will also sound if the parking brake  
is not fully released and the vehicle is moving.  
If it stays on after your parking brake is fully  
released, it means you have a brake problem.  
The brake light will also come on to indicate a  
low brake fluid level. See Brakes on page 343  
for more information.  
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off  
the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the  
pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closer  
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is  
still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See  
Towing Your Vehicle on page 284.  
Brake System Warning Light  
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided  
into two parts. If one part is not working, the  
other part can still work and stop you. For good  
braking, though, you need both parts working well.  
If the brake system warning light comes on,  
there is a brake problem. Have your brake system  
inspected right away.  
{CAUTION:  
United States  
Canada  
Your brake system may not be working  
properly if the brake system warning light  
is on. Driving with the brake system  
warning light on can lead to an accident.  
If the light is still on after you have pulled  
off the road and stopped carefully, have  
the vehicle towed for service.  
The brake light is located in the instrument  
panel cluster.  
This light should come on briefly when you turn  
the ignition key to RUN. If it does not come  
on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to  
warn you if there is a problem.  
When the ignition is on, the brake light will come  
on when you set your parking brake. The light  
will stay on if your parking brake does not release  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To reset the system, do the following:  
Anti-Lock Brake System  
Warning Light  
1. If you are driving, pull over when it is safe  
to do so.  
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, the anti-lock  
brake system (ABS) warning light will come  
on briefly, as a check, when you start your vehicle.  
If it does not, have your vehicle serviced so that  
the light works properly when it needs to.  
2. Be sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).  
3. Turn off the ignition.  
4. Then restart the engine.  
If the light remains on after resetting the system  
or comes on again while driving, your vehicle  
needs service. If the ABS light is on, but the  
regular brake system warning light is not on, the  
anti-lock brakes are not working properly, but  
the regular brakes are still functioning. Have your  
vehicle serviced right away. If both brake lights  
are on, you do not have anti-lock brakes, and  
there’s a problem with your regular brakes as well.  
Have your vehicle towed for service. See Towing  
Your Vehicle on page 284.  
The ABS light is located  
in the instrument panel  
cluster, to the left of  
the engine coolant  
temperature gage.  
If the light stays on longer than a few seconds  
after you start your engine, or comes on and stays  
on while you are driving, try resetting the system.  
The anti-lock brake system warning light should  
come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to  
RUN. If the light does not come on then, have it  
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a  
problem.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For vehicles equipped with the  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
Warning Light  
3.5L V6 engine, the traction control system  
will be turned off when the shift lever is  
in REVERSE (R) or LOW (L). The traction  
control system warning light will be displayed  
on the instrument panel. The traction  
control system can be activated again by  
selecting DRIVE (D) or INTERMEDIATE (I).  
Your vehicle may have  
a traction control system  
warning light. The  
traction control system  
warning light may  
come on for the  
following reasons:  
If there is an engine-related and brake system  
problem that is specifically related to traction  
control, the traction control system will  
For vehicles equipped with the 2.2L L4  
turn off and the warning light will come on.  
engine, turn the system off by pressing  
the traction control button located on the  
instrument panel above the audio system.  
The warning light will come on and stay on.  
To turn the system back on, press the  
button again. The warning light should go off.  
page 238 for more information.  
If the traction control system warning light comes on  
and stays on for an extended period of time when  
the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If this happens you should pull over and see  
Engine Overheating on page 334 for more  
information.  
Low Traction Light  
If your vehicle has the  
Traction Control System  
(TCS), this light will  
come on when the  
system is limiting  
wheel spin.  
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant  
temperature warning light on could cause your  
vehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheating  
on page 334. Your vehicle could be damaged,  
and it might not be covered by your warranty.  
Never drive with the engine coolant  
You may feel or hear the system working, but this  
is normal. The roads may be slippery if this  
light comes on. Adjust your driving accordingly.  
temperature warning light on.  
This light will come on and flash when the  
temperature of the automatic transmission fluid is  
too high. If this happens you should pull over,  
shift into PARK (P) and let the engine idle until  
the light goes out.  
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the  
system stops limiting wheel spin. This light should  
also come on for a few seconds when you start your  
vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.  
This light will also come on briefly when  
starting your vehicle. If it does not, have  
your vehicle serviced.  
Engine Coolant Temperature  
Warning Light  
The engine coolant  
temperature warning  
light will come on  
when the engine  
has overheated.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage  
Low Coolant Warning Light  
This gage displays the  
temperature of the  
vehicle’s engine.  
This light comes on  
briefly when you turn  
your ignition on.  
If this light comes on and stays on, the coolant level  
in your vehicle is low. If the light is on along with  
an overheat warning, you may have a serious  
overheating problem. See Engine Coolant  
Temperature Gage on page 174.  
If the indicator needle moves into the shaded  
area, the engine is too hot. The engine coolant  
temperature warning light will also come on when  
the engine has overheated. See Engine Coolant  
Temperature Warning Light on page 173 for more  
information.  
Notice: Driving with the low coolant warning  
light on could cause your vehicle to overheat.  
See “Engine Overheating” under Engine  
Coolant on page 331. Your vehicle could be  
damaged and the damages might not be  
covered by your warranty.  
If you have been operating your vehicle under  
normal driving conditions, and the engine coolant  
temperature warning light comes on, you should  
pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the  
engine as soon as possible.  
See Engine Coolant on page 331 for information  
on what to do. Your vehicle should be serviced as  
soon as possible.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with  
this light on, after awhile, the emission controls  
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel  
economy might not be as good, and the engine  
might not run as smoothly. This could lead  
to costly repairs that might not be covered by  
your warranty.  
Malfunction Indicator Lamp  
Check Engine Light  
Your vehicle has  
a computer which  
monitors operation  
of the fuel, ignition,  
and emission control  
systems.  
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,  
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system  
of your vehicle or the replacement of the  
original tires with other than those of the same  
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect  
your vehicle’s emission controls and may  
cause this light to come on. Modifications to  
these systems could lead to costly repairs  
not covered by your warranty. This may also  
result in a failure to pass a required Emission  
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories  
and Modifications on page 304.  
This system is called OBD II (On-Board  
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended  
to assure that emissions are at acceptable  
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce  
a cleaner environment. The check engine light  
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and  
service is required. Malfunctions often will be  
indicated by the system before any problem is  
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage  
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to  
assist your service technician in correctly  
diagnosing any malfunction.  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This light should come on, as a check to show  
you it is working, when the ignition is on and  
the engine is not running. If the light does  
not come on, have it repaired. This light will also  
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:  
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,  
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.  
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do  
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park  
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least  
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light  
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”  
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the  
previous steps, and see your retailer for service  
as soon as possible.  
Light Flashing — A misfire condition has  
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle  
emissions and may damage the emission  
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis  
and service may be required.  
Light On Steady — An emission control  
system malfunction has been detected on  
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be  
required.  
If the Light Is On Steady  
You may be able to correct the emission system  
malfunction by considering the following:  
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?  
If the Light Is Flashing  
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully  
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 309.  
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap  
has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or  
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into  
the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap  
properly installed should turn the light off.  
The following may prevent more serious damage  
to your vehicle:  
Reducing vehicle speed  
Avoiding hard accelerations  
Avoiding steep uphill grades  
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of  
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?  
Emissions Inspection and  
Maintenance Programs  
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The  
condition will usually be corrected when the  
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips  
should turn the light off.  
Some state/provincial and local governments have  
or may begin programs to inspect the emission  
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass  
this inspection could prevent you from getting a  
vehicle registration.  
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?  
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.  
See Gasoline Octane on page 306. Poor fuel  
quality will cause your engine not to run as  
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as  
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put  
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on  
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.  
(These conditions may go away once the engine  
is warmed up.) This will be detected by the  
system and cause the light to turn on.  
Here are some things you need to know in order  
to help your vehicle pass an inspection:  
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the  
check engine light is on or not working properly.  
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD  
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that  
critical emission control systems have not been  
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle  
would be considered not ready for inspection.  
This can happen if you have recently replaced  
your battery or if your battery has run down. The  
diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical  
emission control systems during normal driving.  
This may take several days of routine driving. If you  
have done this and your vehicle still does not pass  
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness,  
your retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.  
If you experience one or more of these conditions,  
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at  
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the  
light off.  
If none of the above steps have made the light  
turn off, your retailer can check the vehicle.  
Your retailer has the proper test equipment and  
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical  
problems that may have developed.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Oil Pressure Light  
{CAUTION:  
If you have a low  
engine oil pressure  
problem, this light  
will stay on after you  
start your engine,  
or come on when you  
are driving.  
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is  
low. If you do, your engine can become so  
hot that it catches fire. You or others could  
be burned. Check your oil as soon as  
possible and have your vehicle serviced.  
This indicates that your engine is not receiving  
enough oil. The engine could be low on oil,  
or could have some other oil problem. Have it  
fixed immediately.  
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance  
may damage the engine. The repairs would  
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow  
the maintenance schedule in this manual for  
changing engine oil.  
The oil light may also come on when the ignition  
is on but the engine is not running, the light  
will come on as a test to show you it is working,  
but the light will go out when you turn the  
ignition to START. If it does not come on with  
the ignition on, you may have a problem with the  
fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This light will come on briefly when the vehicle is  
turned on.  
Change Engine Oil Light  
For more information, see Passlock® on page 108.  
If this light comes on, it  
means that service is  
required for your vehicle.  
Reduced Engine Power Light  
This light will come on  
briefly when you start  
the engine.  
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 420 and  
Engine Oil on page 318 for more information.  
After having the oil changed you will need to  
reset the light. See Engine Oil Life System  
on page 323 for more information.  
This light, along with the service engine soon light  
will be displayed when a noticeable reduction in  
the vehicle’s performance may occur. Stop  
the vehicle and turn off the ignition. Wait for  
10 seconds and restart your vehicle. This may  
correct the condition.  
Security Light  
Your vehicle has  
a Passlock®  
theft-deterrent  
system.  
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed  
when the reduced engine power light is on  
but acceleration and speed may be reduced.  
The performance may be reduced until the next  
time you drive your vehicle. If this light stays  
on, see your retailer as soon as possible  
for diagnosis and repair.  
With this system, the security light will flash as  
you open the door if your ignition is off.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Highbeam On Light  
Gate Ajar Light  
This light comes on  
when the high-beam  
headlamps are in use.  
If this light comes on,  
your liftgate is not  
completely closed.  
Driving with the liftgate  
open can cause  
carbon monoxide (CO)  
to enter the vehicle.  
See Engine Exhaust on page 123 for more  
information.  
page 144 for more information.  
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)  
Indicator Light  
Service Vehicle Soon Light  
This light will come on if  
a condition exists that  
may require the  
vehicle to be taken  
in for service.  
This light is located on  
the instrument panel  
cluster. It comes  
on whenever the  
Daytime Running  
Lamps are on.  
If the light comes on, take your vehicle to your  
dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.  
for further information.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The gage moves a little when you turn a  
corner or speed up.  
Fuel Gage  
When the ignition is on,  
the fuel gage tells you  
about how much  
fuel you have left in  
your tank.  
The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize  
after the ignition is turned on, and will go  
back to empty when you turn the ignition off.  
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and  
Specifications on page 414.  
Low Fuel Warning Light  
The light next to the fuel  
gage will come on  
briefly when you are  
starting the engine.  
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light  
will come on. You still have a little fuel left, but  
you should get more soon. See Low Fuel Warning  
Light on page 181 for more information.  
Here are four things that some owners ask about.  
None of these mean a condition exists with  
your fuel gage:  
This light also comes on when the fuel tank is low  
on fuel. When you add fuel the light should go  
off. If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.  
At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off  
before the gage reads full.  
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than  
the gage indicated. For example, the gage  
may have indicated the tank was half full,  
but it actually took a little more or less than  
half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Audio System(s)  
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then  
read the pages following to familiarize yourself  
with its features.  
{CAUTION:  
This system provides you with a far greater  
access to audio stations and song listings.  
Giving extended attention to entertainment  
tasks while driving can cause a crash and  
you or others can be injured or killed.  
Always keep your eyes on the road and  
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging  
in extended searching while driving.  
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a  
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on  
page 230. By taking a few moments to read this  
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s  
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as  
well as take advantage of its features. While your  
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by  
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the  
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when  
driving conditions permit, you can tune to  
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for  
safe driving. Here are some ways in which you can  
help avoid distraction while driving.  
your favorite stations using the presets and  
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
While your vehicle is parked:  
Setting the Time  
(Without Date Display)  
Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.  
Familiarize yourself with its operation.  
If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with a  
single CD player and preset buttons numbered  
one through six, the radio has a clock button  
for setting the time. You can set the time  
by following these steps:  
Set up your audio system by presetting your  
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and  
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving  
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite  
radio stations using the presets and steering  
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.  
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or  
RUN. Press the power knob, located in the  
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.  
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment  
to your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD  
player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way  
radio, make sure that it can be added by  
checking with your dealer/retailer. Also, check  
federal rules covering mobile radio and  
telephone units. If sound equipment can be  
added, it is very important to do it properly.  
Added sound equipment may interfere with  
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,  
or other systems, and even damage them.  
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the  
operation of sound equipment that has  
been added.  
2. Press the clock button until the hour numbers  
begin flashing on the display. Press the  
clock button a second time and the minute  
numbers begin flashing on the display.  
3. While either the hour or the minute numbers  
are flashing, turn the tune knob, located on  
the upper right side of the radio, clockwise or  
counterclockwise to increase or decrease  
the time.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Press the clock button again until the clock  
display stops flashing to set the currently  
displayed time; otherwise, the flashing stops  
after five seconds and the current time  
displayed will be automatically set.  
3. Press the pushbutton located under any  
one of the labels that you want to change.  
Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,  
the time or the date if selected, increases  
by one.  
Another way to increase the time or date,  
is to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD  
(forward) button.  
To change the time default setting from 12 hour  
to 24 hour, press the clock button and then  
the pushbutton located under the forward arrow  
label. Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,  
press the pushbutton located under the desired  
option to select the default. Press the clock button  
again to apply the selected default, or let the  
screen time out.  
To decrease the time or date, press the  
left SEEK arrow or REV (reverse) button,  
or turn the tune knob, located on the upper  
right side of the radio.  
The date does not automatically display. To see  
the date press the clock button while the radio  
is on. The date with display times out after a few  
seconds and goes back to the normal radio  
and time display.  
Setting the Time (With Date Display)  
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD  
player, the radio has a clock button for setting  
the time and date.  
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD  
player, the radio has a MENU button instead of  
the clock button to set the time and date.  
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:  
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or  
RUN. Press the power knob, located in the  
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.  
2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,  
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and  
year) displays.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:  
The date does not automatically display. To see  
the date press the MENU button and then the  
clock button while the radio is on. The date with  
display times out after a few seconds and  
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or  
RUN. Press the power knob, located in the  
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.  
goes back to the normal radio and time display.  
2. Press the MENU button. Once the clock  
option is displayed.  
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to  
24 hour or to change the date default setting  
from month/day/year to day/month/year, follow  
these instructions:  
3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.  
The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.  
4. Press the pushbutton located under any  
one of the labels that you want to change.  
Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,  
the time or the date if selected, increases  
by one.  
1. Press the clock button and then the  
pushbutton located under the forward arrow  
label. Once the time 12H and 24H, and  
the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)  
and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)  
displays.  
Another way to increase the time or date,  
is to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD  
(forward) button.  
2. Press the pushbutton located under the  
desired option.  
To decrease the time or date, press the left  
SEEK arrow or REV (reverse) button, or  
turn the tune knob, located on the  
upper right side of the radio.  
3. Press the clock or MENU button again to  
apply the selected default, or let the screen  
time out.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Finding a Station  
Radio with CD (Base)  
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,  
FM2 or AM. The display shows the selection.  
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.  
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK  
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station  
and stay there.  
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK  
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The  
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,  
then goes to the next station. Press either  
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.  
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a  
strong signal that are in the selected band.  
Playing the Radio  
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the  
system on and off.  
4(Information): Press this button to switch the  
display between the radio station frequency  
and the time. While the ignition is off, press this  
button to display the time.  
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to  
increase or decrease the volume.  
The radio plays at the previous volume setting  
whenever the radio is turned on. The volume  
can still be manually adjusted by using the  
volume knob.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select  
preset equalization settings.  
Setting Preset Stations  
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),  
can be programmed on the six numbered  
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:  
1. Turn the radio on.  
To return to the manual mode, press the  
EQ button until Manual displays or start to  
manually adjust the bass or treble by pressing  
the tune knob.  
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.  
3. Tune in the desired station.  
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)  
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered  
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep  
sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed and  
released, the station that was set, returns.  
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each  
pushbutton.  
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust the  
balance or fade, press this button or the tune knob  
until the desired speaker control label displays.  
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise  
to adjust the setting. The setting can also be  
adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD,  
or REV buttons.  
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)  
Radio Messages  
BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass  
or treble, press the tune knob or bass/treble  
pushbutton until the desired tone control label  
displays. Turn the tune knob clockwise or  
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the  
setting. The setting can also be adjusted by  
pressing either the SEEK, FWD (forward), or REV  
(reverse) buttons. The display shows the current  
bass or treble level. If a station’s frequency is weak  
or has static, decrease the treble.  
Calibration Error: The audio system has been  
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If  
Calibration Error displays, the radio has not been  
configured properly and your vehicle must be  
returned to your retailer for service.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or  
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)  
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the  
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs  
and DVDs on page 225 for more information.  
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The  
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.  
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the  
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or  
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it  
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.  
If there is no apparent damage, try a known  
good CD.  
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught  
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a  
personal computer and a description label is  
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD  
with a marking pen.  
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears  
on the radio display. As each new track starts  
to play, the track number displays.  
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)  
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and  
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.  
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than  
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an  
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged  
CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While  
using the CD player, use only CDs in good  
condition without any label, load one CD at a  
time, and keep the CD player and the loading  
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and  
debris.  
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be  
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of  
recording, the quality of the music that has been  
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been  
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,  
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading  
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the  
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD  
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in  
this section.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject  
the CD. If the CD is not removed, after several  
seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into  
the player.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this  
button to advance playback quickly within a track.  
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release  
this button to resume playing the track. The  
elapsed time of the track displays.  
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the  
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the CD  
tracks can be listened to in random, rather than  
sequential order. To use random, do the following:  
CD currently playing.  
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go  
to the start of the current track, if more than  
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK  
arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is  
held or pressed multiple times, the player continues  
moving backward or forward through the CD.  
1. To play tracks from the CD in random  
order, press the RDM pushbutton. The random  
icon displays.  
2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off  
random play. The random icon displays.  
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button  
to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is  
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button  
to resume playing the track. The elapsed time  
of the track displays.  
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire  
CD can be repeated.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To use repeat, do the following:  
CD Messages  
To repeat the track, press and release the  
RPT button. An arrow symbol displays.  
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.  
CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or  
the CD ejects, it could be for one of the following  
reasons:  
To repeat the CD, PRESS and hold the RPT  
button for a few seconds. An arrow symbol  
displays. Press RPT again to turn off repeat  
play. When repeat is off, the symbol no longer  
displays.  
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to  
normal, the CD should play.  
You are driving on a very rough road.  
When the road becomes smoother, the CD  
should play.  
4(Information): Press this button to switch the  
display between the track number, elapsed time of  
the track, and the time. When the ignition is off,  
press this button to display the time.  
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or  
upside down.  
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an  
hour and try again.  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio  
when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the  
radio for future listening.  
There could have been a problem while  
burning the CD-R.  
The label could be caught in the CD player.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play  
a CD when listening to the radio.  
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any  
other reason, try a known good CD.  
The CD icon and track number displays while a  
CD is in the player. Press this button again and the  
system automatically searches for an auxiliary  
input device such as a portable audio player.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot  
be corrected, contact your retailer. If the radio  
displays an error message, write it down and  
provide it to your retailer when reporting the  
problem.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack  
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to  
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the  
volume of the portable player. Additional volume  
adjustments from the portable device might  
be needed if the volume is not loud or soft enough.  
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack  
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.  
This is not an audio output; do not plug the  
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.  
However, an external audio device such as  
an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD  
changer, or cassette tape player, etc. can be  
connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as  
another source for audio listening.  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio  
when a portable audio device is playing. The  
portable audio device continues playing, so you  
might want to stop it or power it off.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play  
a CD when a portable audio device is playing.  
Press this button again and the system begins  
playing audio from the connected portable audio  
player. If a portable audio player is not  
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary  
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See  
Defensive Driving on page 230 for more  
information on driver distraction.  
connected, No Input Device Found displays.  
To use a portable audio player, connect a  
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front  
auxiliary input jack. While a device is connected,  
press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing  
audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This system relies upon receiving specific  
information from these stations and only works  
when the information is available. While the radio  
is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station  
name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio  
station can broadcast incorrect information that  
causes the radio features to work improperly. If this  
happens, contact the radio station.  
Radio with CD (MP3)  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service  
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in  
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.  
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast  
channels including music, news, sports, talk,  
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s  
programming. XM™ provides digital quality  
audio and text information that includes song title  
and artist name. A service fee is required in  
order to receive the XM™ service. For more  
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at  
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)  
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call  
Radio with CD shown, Radio with  
Six-Disc CD (MP3) similar  
Radio Data System (RDS)  
The audio system has a Radio Data System  
(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only  
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.  
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playing the Radio  
4(Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,  
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information  
button to display additional text information related  
to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3  
song. A choice of additional information such as:  
Channel, Song, Artist, CAT can display. Continue  
pressing the information button to highlight the  
desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned  
under any one of the labels and the information  
about that label displays.  
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the  
system on and off.  
Turn this knob clockwise to increase or  
counterclockwise to decrease the volume.  
Finding a Station  
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,  
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display shows  
the selection.  
When information is not available, No Info displays.  
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite  
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.  
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station  
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to  
your favorite stations using the presets, favorites  
button, and steering wheel controls, if your vehicle  
has them. See Defensive Driving on page 230.  
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK  
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station  
and stay there.  
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK  
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The  
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,  
then goes to the next station. Press either  
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.  
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations  
can be programmed as favorites using the  
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station  
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites  
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to  
go through up to six pages of favorites, each  
having six favorite stations available per page.  
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a  
strong signal that are in the selected band.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Each page of favorites can contain any  
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)  
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform  
the following steps:  
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages  
by pressing the pushbutton located below the  
displayed page numbers.  
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,  
to return to the original main radio screen  
showing the radio station frequency labels and  
to begin the process of programming your  
favorites for the chosen amount of numbered  
pages.  
1. Tune to the desired radio station.  
2. Press the FAV button to display the page  
where you want the station stored.  
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons  
until a beep sounds. When that pushbutton  
is pressed and released, the station that was  
set, returns.  
Setting the Tone  
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)  
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio  
station you want stored as a favorite.  
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):  
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tune  
knob until the tone control labels display. Continue  
pressing to highlight the desired label, or press the  
pushbutton positioned under the desired label.  
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise  
to adjust the highlighted setting. The highlighted  
setting can also be adjusted by pressing either the  
SEEK, FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button  
until the desired levels are obtained. If a station’s  
frequency is weak, or has static, decrease the  
treble.  
The number of favorites pages can be setup using  
the MENU button. To setup the number of  
favorites pages, perform the following steps:  
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
2. Press the pushbutton located below the  
FAV 1-6 label.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the  
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned  
under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more  
than two seconds. A beep sounds and the level  
adjusts to the middle position.  
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)  
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or  
fade, press the tune knob until the speaker control  
labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the  
desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned  
under the desired label. Turn the tune knob  
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls  
to the middle position, press the tune knob for more  
than two seconds until a beep sounds.  
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the  
highlighted setting. The highlighted setting can also  
be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD, or  
REV button until the desired levels are obtained.  
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select  
preset equalization settings.  
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle  
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the  
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.  
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the  
middle position.  
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ  
button until Manual displays or start to manually  
adjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressing  
the tune knob.  
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to  
the middle position, press the tune knob for more  
than two seconds until a beep sounds.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed  
through the setup menu. To remove an undesired  
category, perform the following:  
Finding a Category (CAT) Station  
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find  
XM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™  
mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired  
category, perform the following:  
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio  
setup menu.  
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM  
CAT label.  
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™  
frequency displays. Press the CAT button to  
display the category labels on the radio  
display. Continue pressing the CAT button  
until the desired category name displays.  
3. Turn the tune knob to display the category  
you want removed.  
4. Press the pushbutton located under the  
Remove label until the category name  
along with the word Removed displays.  
2. Press either of the two buttons below the  
desired category label to immediately tune  
to the first XM™ station associated with  
that category.  
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.  
Removed categories can be restored by pressing  
the pushbutton under the Add label when a  
removed category is displayed or by pressing  
the pushbutton under the Restore All label.  
3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons  
below the right or left arrows displayed,  
or press the right or left SEEK buttons to go  
to the next or previous XM™ station within the  
selected category.  
Categories cannot be removed or added while the  
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).  
4. To exit the category search mode, press the  
FAV button or BAND button to display your  
favorites again.  
Radio Messages for XM™ Only  
See XM Radio Messages on page 209 later in this  
section for further detail.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:  
Radio Messages  
1. Press and hold the load button for  
two seconds. A beep sounds and Load  
All Discs displays.  
Calibration Error: The audio system has been  
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If  
Calibration Error displays, the radio has not been  
configured properly and your vehicle must be  
returned to your retailer for service.  
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to  
insert the discs. The CD player takes up to  
six CDs.  
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)  
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading  
more CDs.  
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.  
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin  
playing.  
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the  
player, it stays in the player. While the ignition or  
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it  
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.  
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)  
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the  
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.  
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays on  
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the  
track number displays.  
To insert one CD, do the following:  
1. Press and release the load button.  
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.  
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)  
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs  
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same  
manner.  
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,  
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be  
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of  
recording, the quality of the music that has been  
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been  
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,  
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading  
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the  
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD  
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or  
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than  
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an  
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged  
CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While  
using the CD player, use only CDs in good  
condition without any label, load one CD at a  
time, and keep the CD player and the loading  
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and  
debris.  
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the  
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs  
and DVDs on page 225 for more information.  
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in  
this section.  
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject  
CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,  
press and release this button. A beep sounds and  
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,  
Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.  
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,  
the CD automatically pulls back into the player and  
begins playing.  
If there is no apparent damage, try a known  
good CD.  
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught  
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a  
personal computer and a description label is  
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD  
with a marking pen.  
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the  
eject button for two seconds to eject all discs.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the  
tracks can be listened to in random, rather  
than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in a  
six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of  
the following:  
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the  
CD currently playing.  
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go  
to the start of the current track, if more than  
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK  
arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow  
is held, or pressed multiple times, the player  
continues moving backward or forward through the  
tracks on the CD.  
To play the tracks from the CD in random  
order, press the pushbutton positioned  
under the RDM label until Random Current  
Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to  
turn off random play.  
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a  
six-disc CD player in random order, press  
the pushbutton positioned under the  
RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays.  
Press the same pushbutton again to turn  
off random play.  
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button  
to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is  
heard at a reduced volume. Release this button  
to resume playing the track. The elapsed time  
of the track displays.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this  
button to advance playback quickly within a track.  
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release  
this button to resume playing the track. The  
elapsed time of the track displays.  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio  
when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the  
radio for future listening.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play  
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon  
and track number displays when a CD is in  
the player.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack  
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.  
An external audio device such as a portable audio  
player can be connected to the auxiliary input  
jack for use as another source for playing CDs.  
CD Messages  
CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or  
the CD comes out, it could be for one of the  
following reasons:  
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to  
normal, the CD should play.  
Press the CD/AUX button again and the system  
begins playing audio from the connected portable  
audio player. If a portable audio player is not  
connected, No Input Device Found displays.  
You are driving on a very rough road.  
When the road becomes smoother, the CD  
should play.  
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc  
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or  
upside down.  
Your vehicle’s radio system may have the  
MP3 feature. If it has this feature, it is capable  
of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more  
information on how to play an MP3 CD-R or  
CD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 202 later  
in this section.  
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an  
hour and try again.  
There could have been a problem while  
burning the CD.  
The label could be caught in the CD player.  
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any  
other reason, try a known good CD.  
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error  
cannot be corrected, contact your retailer. If the  
radio displays an error message, write it down  
and provide it to your retailer when reporting  
the problem.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack  
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise to  
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the  
volume of the portable player. Additional volume  
adjustments might be needed from the portable  
device if the volume is not loud or soft enough.  
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack  
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.  
This is not an audio output; do not plug the  
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.  
However, an external audio device such as  
an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD  
changer, or cassette tape player, etc. can be  
connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as  
another source for audio listening.  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio  
when a portable audio device is playing. The  
portable audio device continues playing, so you  
might want to stop it or power it off.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play  
a CD when a portable audio device is playing.  
Press this button again and the system begins  
playing audio from the connected portable  
audio player. If a portable audio player is not  
connected, No Input Device Found displays.  
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary  
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See  
Defensive Driving on page 230 for more  
information on driver distraction.  
To use a portable audio player, connect a  
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front  
auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected,  
press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing  
audio from the device over the vehicle speakers.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you are interested in learning more about the  
DVD functions of this radio system, see Rear Seat  
Entertainment System on page 211 later in this  
section for more information.  
Radio with CD and DVD  
Using an MP3  
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc  
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a  
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded  
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps,  
56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,  
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,  
256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.  
Song title, artist name, and album are available for  
display by the radio when recorded using ID3  
tags version 1 and 2.  
If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment  
(RSE) system, the vehicle has a radio that accepts  
either CD audio or DVD video.  
Compressed Audio  
The radio with CD and DVD is very similar to  
the radio with CD (Base) or the radio with  
CD (MP3). If you are interested in learning more  
about the radio and CD audio functions for  
this type of radio system, see Radio with CD  
on page 192 earlier in this section for more  
information.  
The radio also plays discs that contain both  
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3  
files. By default the radio reads only the  
uncompressed audio and ignore the MP3 files.  
Pressing the CAT (category) button toggles  
between compressed and uncompressed  
audio format.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MP3 Format  
Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist  
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a  
combination of a large number of files and  
folders, or playlists can cause the player to be  
unable to play up to the maximum number of  
files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish  
to play a large number of files, folders, playlists  
or sessions, minimize the length of the file,  
folder, or playlist name. Long names also take  
up more space on the display, potentially  
getting cut off.  
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal  
computer:  
Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a  
CD-R or CD-RW disc.  
Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files on  
one disc.  
The CD player is able to read and play a  
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and  
255 files.  
Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.  
Trying to add music to an existing disc can  
cause the disc not to function in  
the player.  
Create a folder structure that makes it easy to  
find songs while driving. Organize songs by  
albums using one folder for each album.  
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs  
or less.  
Change playlists by using the previous and next  
folder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.  
You can also play an MP3 CD-R that was recorded  
using no file folders. If a CD-R contains more than  
the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and  
255 files, the player lets you access and navigate  
up to the maximum, but all items over the maximum  
are not accessible.  
Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to  
8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total  
number of folders to a minimum in order to  
reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to  
locate a particular folder during playback.  
Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl  
extension (other file extensions might  
not work).  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the CD-R contains only playlists and  
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are  
located under the root folder. The folder down and  
the folder up buttons searches playlists (Px) first  
and then go to the root folder. When the radio  
displays the name of the folder the radio  
displays ROOT.  
Root Directory  
The root directory of the CD-R is treated as a  
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio  
files, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All  
files contained directly under the root directory  
are accessed prior to any root directory folders.  
However, playlists (Px) are always accessed  
before root folders or files.  
Order of Play  
Tracks recorded to the CD-R are played in the  
following order:  
Empty Directory or Folder  
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere  
in the file structure that contains only folders/  
subfolders and no compressed files directly  
beneath them, the player advances to the next  
folder in the file structure that contains compressed  
audio files. The empty folder does not display.  
Play begins from the first track in the first  
playlist and continues sequentially through  
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track  
of the last playlist has played, play continues  
from the first track of the first playlist.  
Play begins from the first track in the first  
folder and continues sequentially through  
all tracks in each folder. When the last track  
of the last folder has been played, play  
continues from the first track of the first folder.  
No Folder  
When the CD-R contains only compressed files,  
the files are located under the root folder. The next  
and previous folder functions do not display on  
a CD-R that was recorded without folders or  
playlists. When displaying the name of the  
folder the radio displays ROOT.  
When play enters a new folder, the display does  
not automatically show the new folder name unless  
you have chosen the folder mode as the default  
display. The new track name displays.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File System and Naming  
Playing an MP3  
The song name that is displayed is the song  
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song  
name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the  
radio displays the file name without the extension  
(such as .mp3) as the track name.  
Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CD  
Player), or press the load button and wait for the  
message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),  
label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R  
should begin playing.  
Track names longer than 32 characters or  
four pages are shortened. The display does not  
show parts of words on the last page of text  
and the extension of the filename does not display.  
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD-R in  
the player it stays in the player. When you  
turn on the ignition or radio, the CD-R starts to  
play where it stopped, if it was the last selected  
audio source.  
Preprogrammed Playlists  
As each new track starts to play, the track number  
and song title displays.  
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using  
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™  
software can be accessed, however, they cannot  
be edited using the radio. These playlists are  
treated as special folders containing compressed  
audio song files.  
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)  
single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-size  
CD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in  
the same manner.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be  
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of  
recording, the quality of the music that has been  
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been  
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,  
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading  
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the  
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD  
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or  
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught  
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a  
personal computer and a description label is  
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD  
with a marking pen.  
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in  
this section.  
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject  
CD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently  
playing, press and release this button. A beep  
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc  
is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R  
can be removed. If the CD-R is not removed, after  
several seconds, the CD-R automatically pulls  
back into the player and begins playing. For the  
Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject button  
for two seconds to eject all discs.  
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the  
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs  
and DVDs on page 225 for more information.  
If there is no apparent damage, try a known  
good CD.  
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more  
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a  
time, or an attempt is made to play scratched  
or damaged CDs, the CD player could be  
damaged. While using the CD player, use only  
CDs in good condition without any label,  
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player  
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,  
liquids, and debris.  
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on  
the CD-R currently playing.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to  
the start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten  
seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow  
to go to the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is  
held or pressed multiple times, the player continues  
moving backward or forward through MP3 files on  
the CD.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this  
button to advance playback quickly within an MP3  
file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.  
Release this button to resume playing the file.  
The elapsed time of the file displays.  
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3  
files on the CD-R can be listened to in random,  
rather than sequential order, on one CD-R  
or all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random,  
do one of the following:  
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton  
positioned under the Folder label to go to the  
first track in the previous folder.  
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R you are  
listening to in random order, press the  
c T(Next Folder): Press the pushbutton  
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first  
track in the next folder.  
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label  
until Random Current Disc displays. Press the  
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.  
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to  
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound  
is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button  
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the  
file displays.  
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc  
CD player in random order, press the  
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label  
until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the  
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To change from playback by artist to playback by  
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort  
By label. From the sort screen, push one of the  
buttons below the album button. Press the  
pushbutton below the back label to return to the  
main music navigator screen. Now the album name  
is displayed on the second line between the arrows  
and songs from the current album begins to play.  
Once all songs from that album are played, the  
player moves to the next album in alphabetical  
order on the CD-R and begins playing MP3 files  
from that album.  
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator  
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in order  
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located  
below the music navigator label. The player scans  
the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3  
tag information. It can take several minutes to scan  
the disc depending on the number of MP3 files  
recorded to the CD-R. The radio can begin playing  
while it is scanning the disc in the background.  
When the scan is finished, the CD-R begins  
playing again.  
Once the disc has been scanned, the player  
defaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist. The  
current artist playing is shown on the second line of  
the display between the arrows. Once all songs by  
that artist are played, the player moves to the next  
artist in alphabetical order on the CD-R and begin  
playing MP3 files by that artist. To listen to MP3  
files by another artist, press the pushbutton located  
below either arrow button. The CD goes to the next  
or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue  
pressing either button until the desired artist is  
displayed.  
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton  
below the Back label to return to normal MP3  
playback.  
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio  
while a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the  
radio for future listening.  
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play  
a CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon  
and a message showing disc and/or track number  
displays while a CD is in the player. Press this  
button again and the system automatically  
searches for an auxiliary input device such as a  
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is  
not connected, No Aux Input Device displays.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
XM Radio Messages  
Radio Display Message  
Condition  
Action Required  
XL (Explicit Language  
Channels)  
XL on the radio display, These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a  
after the channel name, customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).  
indicates content with  
explicit language.  
XM Updating  
No XM Signal  
Loading XM  
Updating  
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no  
action is required. This process should take no longer than  
30 seconds.  
encryption code  
Loss of signal  
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a  
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move into  
an open area, the signal should return.  
Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and  
(after four second delay) text data. No action is needed. This message should  
disappear shortly.  
Channel Off Air  
Channel Unavail  
Channel not in service  
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to  
another channel.  
Channel no  
longer available  
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune  
to another station. If this station was one of the presets,  
choose another station for that preset button.  
No Artist Info  
No Title Info  
Artist Name/Feature  
not available  
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.  
The system is working properly.  
Song/Program Title  
not available  
No song title information is available at this time on this  
channel. The system is working properly.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Radio Display Message  
Condition  
Action Required  
No CAT Info  
Category Name  
not available  
No category information is available at this time on this  
channel. The system is working properly.  
No Information  
CAT Not Found  
XM TheftLocked  
No Text/Informational  
message available  
No text or informational messages are available at this time  
on this channel. The system is working properly.  
No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category.  
the chosen category  
Theftlock® active  
The system is working properly.  
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle could have previously been  
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers  
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message  
appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with  
your retailer.  
XM Radio ID  
Unknown  
Radio ID label  
(channel 0)  
If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the XM™  
Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to  
activate the service.  
Radio ID not known  
(should only be if  
hardware failure)  
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there  
could be a receiver fault. Consult with your retailer.  
Check XM Receivr  
XM Not Available  
Hardware failure  
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,  
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your retailer.  
XM™ Not Available  
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,  
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your retailer.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Headphones  
Rear Seat Entertainment System  
The RSE includes two sets of wireless  
headphones that are only dedicated to this  
system. These headphones are used to listen  
to the radio with CD and DVD or an auxiliary  
device connected to the RCA jacks. The wireless  
headphones have an ON/OFF switch and a  
volume control.  
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat  
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system  
works with the vehicle’s audio system and includes  
a radio that accepts CD audio or DVD video, a  
video display screen, two sets of wireless  
headphones, and a remote control.  
Before You Drive  
To use the headphones, turn the switch to ON.  
An indicator light on the headphones comes on.  
If the light does not come on, the batteries  
might need to be replaced. See “Battery  
Replacement” later in this section for more  
information. Switch the headphones to OFF  
when not in use.  
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers  
only. The driver cannot safely view the video  
screen while driving and should not try to do so.  
In severe or extreme weather conditions the  
RSE system might not work until the temperature  
is within the operating range. The operating  
range for the RSE system is above 4°F (20°C)  
or below 140°F (60°C). If the temperature of  
your vehicle is outside of this range, heat or cool  
the vehicle until the temperature is within the  
operating range of the RSE system.  
The infrared transmitters are located in the display  
below the video screen. The headphones shut  
off automatically to save the battery power if the  
DVD system is shut off or if the headphones  
are out of range of the transmitters for more than  
three minutes. If you move too far forward or  
step out of the vehicle, the headphones lose the  
audio signal.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the  
volume control located on the right side.  
Stereo RCA Jacks  
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat  
or direct sunlight. This could damage the  
headphones and repairs will not be covered by  
your warranty. Keep the headphones stored  
in a cool, dry place.  
Battery Replacement  
To change the batteries, do the following:  
1. Slide open the battery door located on the left  
side of the headphones.  
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the  
compartment. Make sure that they are  
installed correctly, using the diagram on the  
inside of the battery compartment.  
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen  
on the overhead console. The RCA jacks allow  
audio or video signals to be connected from an  
auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video  
game unit to the RSE. Adapter connectors or  
cables might be required to connect the auxiliary  
device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the  
3. Slide the battery door shut.  
If the headphones are to be stored for a long  
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them  
in a cool, dry place.  
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The RCA jacks are color coded to match typical  
home entertainment system equipment. The yellow  
jack (right) is for the video input. The white jack  
(middle) is for the left audio input. The red jack (left)  
is for the right audio input. The red connector must  
always be used in order for the DVD system to  
recognize that an external source is plugged in.  
With the radio on, the screen automatically  
switches to the rear auxiliary input when the  
red connector cable is inserted.  
Press the power button to turn the radio on.  
The radio can be heard through all of the  
vehicle speakers.  
When a DVD is inserted, playback is heard  
through the vehicle speakers and headphones.  
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio  
by pressing the BAND button to select AM, FM or  
XM™ (if equipped). The rear seat speakers are  
muted for radio listening, and the DVD plays  
through the headphones (RSE Mode).  
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the  
radio system.  
When RCA jacks are connected, the rear speakers  
are muted. The rear seat passengers are able  
to hear audio from the auxiliary device through the  
wireless headphones. The front seat passengers  
are able to listen to the radio through the front  
speakers, by pressing the BAND button to select  
AM, FM, or XM (if equipped), or listen to a CD  
that is inserted into the radio.  
To use the auxiliary function, connect a camcorder  
or a video game unit to the RCA jacks and turn on  
the auxiliary device. To view a DVD, insert the DVD  
into the CD/DVD loading slot on the radio. The  
system automatically switches to DVD and starts to  
play. To switch between the auxiliary device and  
the DVD, press the DVD/AUX button on the radio  
faceplate or the SRCE (source) button on the  
remote control. See “DVD Player” and “Remote  
Control” later in this section for more information.  
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s  
auxiliary input jack, the device can be heard  
through all of the vehicle speakers. In RSE mode  
the playback device is only heard through the  
front speakers.  
Audio Output  
Only one audio source can be heard through the  
speakers at one time.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Screen  
DVD Player  
The video screen is located in the overhead  
console.  
To use the video screen, do the following:  
1. Push forward on the release button located on  
the DVD display console.  
2. Pull the screen down, away from you, and  
adjust its position as desired.  
When the video screen is not in use, push it up  
into its locked position.  
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to  
its locked position, the screen shuts off, but  
the DVD continues to play through the previous  
audio or video source.  
The DVD player is part of the radio and is located  
in the center of the instrument panel.  
The video screen contains the transmitters for the  
wireless headphones and the receivers for the  
remote control. If the screen is in the closed  
position, the signals are not available for the  
operation of the headphones or the remote control.  
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on  
the radio faceplate, or by the buttons on the  
remote control. See “Remote Control” later in this  
section for more information.  
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video  
screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning  
the Video Screen” later in this section for  
more information.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs that  
are authorized for use in the United States and  
Canada (Region Code 1). The DVD region code is  
printed on the jacket of most DVDs. Most audio  
CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s can also be  
played by the radio with CD and DVD.  
DVD/AUX (Auxiliary): While a DVD is playing,  
press this button to switch between front auxiliary  
and RSE.  
To listen to a DVD through the headphones, press  
this button.  
While a CD is playing, press this button to switch  
between playing a CD or the front auxiliary, if not in  
RSE mode. If the system is in RSE mode, press the  
power button on the remote control first, to listen to  
the CD through the headphones, while the front  
passengers listen to the front auxiliary.  
If an error message displays on the video screen  
or the radio, see “DVD Player Error Messages”  
later in this section.  
Auxiliary Input Jack  
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack  
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.  
An external audio device such as an iPod,  
MP3 player, or cassette player can be connected  
to the auxiliary input jack for use as another  
source for audio listening.  
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the  
radio/DVD player on. Turn this knob clockwise  
to or counterclockwise to increase or decrease  
the volume. A single press turns the radio  
off, a quick double press turns off the entire  
radio and rear seat entertainment system.  
DVD Player Buttons  
To learn about the DVD functions for this type  
of radio system, read the following for more  
information on the DVD player.  
f (Tune): Turn this knob to change tracks on a  
CD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station, or to  
change clock or date settings, while in the clock  
or date setting mode. See Setting the Time  
more information.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this  
button to return to the start of the current track  
or chapter. Press this button again to go to  
the previous track or chapter. This button might  
not work while the DVD is playing the copyright  
information or the previews.  
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button to  
fast forward the DVD or CD. The radio displays  
the elapsed time and fast forwards five times  
the normal speed. To stop fast forwarding, press  
this button again. This button might not work while  
the DVD is playing the copyright information or  
the previews.  
¨ SEEK (Next Track/Chapter): Press this  
button to advance to the beginning of the next  
track or chapter. This button might not work while  
the DVD is playing the copyright information or  
the previews.  
Some DVDs begins playing after the previews have  
finished, although there could be a delay of up to  
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the  
movie automatically, press the pushbutton located  
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the  
radio. If the DVD still does not play, refer to the  
on-screen instructions, if available.  
s REV (Reverse): Press this button to fast  
reverse the DVD or CD, five times the normal  
speed. The radio displays the elapsed time while  
in fast reverse. To stop fast reversing, press  
this button again. This button might not work while  
the DVD is playing the copyright information or  
the previews.  
Z(Eject): Press this button to eject a DVD or  
CD. If a DVD or CD is ejected, but not removed,  
the player automatically pulls it back in after  
15 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing  
the movie automatically, press the pushbutton  
located under the play symbol tag displayed on the  
radio. If the DVD still does not play, refer to the  
on-screen instructions (if available).  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Nav (Navigate): Press this button to display  
directional arrows for navigating through  
the menus.  
DVD Display Buttons  
Once a DVD is inserted, a screen display menu  
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press  
the pushbuttons located under any desired tag  
option during DVD playback. See the tag options  
listed below for more information:  
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current  
active menu and return to the previous menu.  
This button operates only when a DVD is playing  
and a menu is active.  
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or  
pause icon displayed on the radio system,  
to toggle between pausing or restarting playback  
of a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing on  
display, the system is in pause mode. If the pause  
icon is showing on display, the system is in  
playback mode.  
Playing a Disc  
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label  
side up, into the loading slot. The player starts  
loading the disc into the system and display  
“Loading Disc” on the video screen. At the same  
time, the radio displays a softkey menu of options.  
The first option tag located on the left-hand side of  
the menu options, displays alternately the play or  
pause symbols. This indicates the system is loading  
the disc or is not yet ready to accept a play button  
press. The displayed symbol arrow remains until  
the disc is completely loaded or Promos and  
Copyright information has ended. The time can vary  
depending on the discs media type and format.  
Once the DVD is loaded into the system, a pause  
icon displays instead of the forward arrow. This  
indicates the system is in play mode, and the disc  
automatically starts playback.  
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,  
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.  
r (Enter): Press this button to select the  
choices that are highlighted in any menu.  
y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVD  
menu. The DVD menu is different on every  
DVD. Use the pushbuttons located under the  
navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through  
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the  
enter button. This button only operates when  
using a DVD.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading a disc into the system usually takes  
approximately 30 seconds for playback to begin.  
Stopping and Resuming Playback  
To turn the RSE system off, press the power  
button twice on the radio.  
If a DVD is already in the radio, press the  
play/pause button on the remote control, or press  
the pushbutton located under the play symbol  
tag displayed on the radio to start playing the disc,  
when the DVD system is active.  
To turn the RSE system back on again, press the  
power button on the radio, then press the DVD/AUX  
button. This brings up the softkey menu displayed  
on the radio. Press the play/pause icon to begin  
playback from where it had previously stopped.  
The DVD player might not accept some paper  
labeled media.  
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the  
system, press the stop button on the remote  
control, or press the pushbutton located under the  
stop or the play/pause symbol tags displayed  
on the radio.  
The DVD player/video screen can only be turned  
on by pressing the power button on the remote  
control or by inserting a DVD.  
Playing an MP3 CD  
To resume DVD playback, press the play/pause  
button on the remote control, or press the  
The CD player has the ability to recognize up to  
255 folders, and up to 255 files per folder to  
a maximum of 512 total MP3 selections on a CD.  
Mixed media CD’s are not supported.  
pushbutton located under the play/pause symbol  
tag displayed on the radio. The DVD should resume  
play from where it last stopped if the disc has not  
been ejected and the stop button has not been  
pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has  
been ejected or the stop button has been pressed  
twice on the remote control, the disc resumes  
playing at the beginning of the disc.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ejecting a Disc  
Remote Control Buttons  
Press the eject button on the radio to eject the disc.  
If a disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed,  
the radio reloads the disc after a short period of  
time. The disc is stored in the radio. The radio does  
not resume play of the disc automatically.  
Remote Control  
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter  
window below the video screen and press the  
desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light  
could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to  
receive signals from the remote control. If the  
remote control does not seem to be working, the  
batteries might need to be replaced. See “Battery  
Replacement” later in this section. Objects blocking  
the line of sight could also affect the function of the  
remote control.  
O(Power): Press this button to turn the RSE  
screen on and off (also powers up the DVD player  
if a disc is loaded).  
The DVD player can only be turned on by pressing  
the DVD/AUX button on the radio.  
P(Illumination): Press this button to turn the  
remote control backlight on. The backlight  
times out after seven to ten seconds if no other  
button is pressed while the backlight is on.  
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot  
area or in direct sunlight can damage it,  
and the repairs will not be covered by your  
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a  
cool, dry place.  
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to  
the main menu of the DVD.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access  
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every  
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow  
buttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.  
After making a selection press the enter button.  
This button only operates when using a DVD.  
{ (Subtitle): Press this button to turn on  
subtitles and to move through subtitle options  
when a DVD is playing. The format and content of  
this function varies for each disc.  
| (Camera Angle): Press this button to  
change camera angles on DVDs that have this  
feature when a DVD is playing. The format  
and content of this function varies for each disc.  
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use  
the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.  
r (Enter): Press this button to select the  
choices that are highlighted in any menu.  
r(Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast  
reverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing,  
press this button again. This button might not work  
when the DVD is playing the copyright information  
or the previews.  
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust  
the color, tint, brightness, contrast, and display  
mode (normal, full, or zoom). The dynamic range  
compression feature can be used to reduce  
loud audio and increase low audio produced by  
some DVDs.  
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch  
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.  
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast  
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding,  
press this button again. This button might not work  
when the DVD is playing the copyright information  
or the previews.  
q(Return): Press this button to exit the current  
active menu and return to the previous menu.  
This button operates only when a DVD is playing  
and a menu is active.  
e(Audio): Press this button to display a menu  
that only appears when a DVD is playing. The  
format and content of this function varies for  
each disc.  
c(Stop): Press this button to stop playing,  
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this  
button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
s(Play/Pause): Press this button to start play  
of a DVD or CD. Press this button while a  
DVD or CD is playing to pause it. Press this button  
again to continue playing the DVD.  
\(Clear): Press this button, within three seconds  
after entering a numeric selection to clear all  
numeric inputs.  
}10 (Double Digit Entries): Press the button, to  
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater  
than nine. Press this button before inputting  
the number.  
While the DVD is playing, press the pause button  
then press the fast forward button. The DVD  
continues playing in a slow play mode. To cancel  
slow play mode, press the play/pause button.  
Battery Replacement  
t(Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button  
to return to the start of the current track or chapter.  
Press this button again to go to the previous  
track or chapter. This button might not work when  
the DVD is playing the copyright information or  
the previews.  
To change the remote control batteries, do the  
following:  
1. Remove the battery compartment door  
located on the bottom of the remote control.  
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the  
compartment. Make sure that they are  
installed correctly, using the diagram on  
the inside of the battery compartment.  
u(Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to  
advance to the beginning of the next track  
or chapter. This button might not work when the  
DVD is playing the copyright information or  
the previews.  
3. Close the battery door securely.  
If the remote control is to be stored for a long  
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them  
in a cool, dry place.  
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric  
keypad provides the capability of direct chapter,  
title, and track number selection.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD Player Error Messages  
DVD Distortion  
The video screen could display one of  
the following:  
Video distortion could occur when operating  
cellular phones, scanners, CB radios, Global  
Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile  
fax, or walkie talkies.  
Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays  
when there are disc load or eject problems.  
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player  
when operating one of these devices in or near  
the vehicle.  
*Excludes the OnStar® System.  
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the  
disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side  
up, or if the disc is damaged.  
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the  
disc is not from a correct region.  
Cleaning the DVD Player  
When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and  
buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened  
with clean water.  
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no  
disc is present when the EJECT or DVD/AUX  
button is pressed on the radio.  
Cleaning the Video Screen  
When cleaning the video screen, use only a  
clean cloth dampened with clean water. Use care  
when directly touching or cleaning the screen,  
as damage could result.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While a CD is playing, press the up or the down  
arrow to go to the next or previous track.  
Audio Steering Wheel Controls  
Some audio controls  
can be adjusted at the  
steering wheel. They  
include the following:  
To scan the current CD, press and hold either  
up or down arrow for more than two seconds.  
The CD goes to the next track, plays the  
first 10 seconds, then goes to the next track.  
Press either up or down arrow again to stop  
scanning.  
To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and  
hold either up or down arrow for more than  
four seconds. The CD goes to the next CD, plays  
the first 10 seconds of each track, then goes to  
the next CD. Press either up or down arrow again  
to stop scanning.  
x w: Press the up or the down arrow to go to  
the next or to the previous radio station and  
stay there. The radio seeks stations only with a  
strong signal that are in the selected band.  
+ (Volume): Press the plus or minus button to  
increase or to decrease the volume.  
g(Mute): Press this button to silence the system.  
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for  
two seconds until SCAN displays and a beep  
sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a  
few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press  
either arrow again to stop scanning.  
Press this button again, to turn the sound on.  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FM Stereo  
Radio Reception  
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals  
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).  
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM  
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.  
Frequency interference and static during normal  
radio reception can occur if items such as  
cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience  
accessories, and external electronic devices are  
plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is  
interference or static, unplug the item from the  
accessory power outlet.  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service  
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio  
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous  
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,  
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite  
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.  
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy  
foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels could cause  
loss of XM signal for a period of time. The  
radio might display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate  
interference.  
AM  
The range for most AM stations is greater than for  
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause  
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For  
better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost  
the power levels during the day, and then reduce  
these levels during the night. Static can also occur  
when things like storms and power lines interfere  
with radio reception. When this happens, try  
reducing the treble on your radio.  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Care of Your CDs and DVDs  
Fixed Mast Antenna  
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original  
cases or other protective cases and away from  
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the  
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is  
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,  
the CD does not play properly or not at all. If the  
surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth  
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral  
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.  
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center  
to the edge.  
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car  
washes without being damaged. If the mast should  
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by  
hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.  
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still  
tightened to the antenna base. If tightening is  
required, tighten by hand.  
XM™ Satellite Radio  
Antenna System  
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while  
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up  
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of  
the hole and the outer edge.  
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on  
the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of  
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.  
A vehicle with a sunroof might not get the  
best performance from the XM™ system if the  
sunroof is open.  
Care of the CD and DVD Player  
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not  
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens  
of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the  
CD mechanism.  
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can  
interfere with the performance of the XM™ system.  
Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is  
not obstructed.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 4  
Driving Your Vehicle  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driver Behavior  
Your Driving, the Road, and  
Your Vehicle  
The single most important thing is this: everyone in  
the vehicle, including the driver, should buckle up.  
Whenever we drive, we are taking on an  
important responsibility. This is true for any  
motor vehicle — passenger car, van, truck, sport  
utility. Driver behavior, the driving environment,  
and the vehicle’s design all affect how well  
a vehicle performs. But statistics show that the  
most important factor, by far, is how we drive.  
page 20. In fact, most serious injuries and fatalities  
to unbelted occupants can be reduced or prevented  
by the use of safety belts. In a rollover crash,  
an unbelted person is significantly more likely to  
die than a person wearing a seat belt. In addition,  
avoiding excessive speed, sudden or abrupt turns,  
and drunken or aggressive driving can help make  
trips safer and avoid the possibility of a crash,  
especially a rollover crash. This section provides  
many useful tips to help you drive more safely.  
Knowing how these three factors work together  
can help you understand how your vehicle  
handles and what you can do to avoid many  
types of crashes, including a rollover crash.  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Driving Environment  
Vehicle Design  
According to the U.S. Department of  
You can also help avoid a rollover or other  
type of crash by being prepared for driving in  
inclement weather, at night, or during other times  
where visibility or traction may be limited, such  
as on curves, slippery roads, or hilly terrain.  
Unfamiliar surroundings can also have hidden  
hazards.  
Transportation, utility vehicles have a significantly  
higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.  
Utility vehicles do have higher ground clearance  
and a narrower track or shorter wheelbase than  
passenger cars, to make them more capable  
for off-road driving. Specific design characteristics  
like these give the driver a better view of the  
road, but also give utility vehicles a higher center  
of gravity than other types of vehicles. This means  
that you should not expect a utility vehicle to  
handle the same way a vehicle with a lower center  
of gravity, like a car, would in similar situations.  
To help you learn more about driving in different  
conditions, this section contains information  
about city, freeway, and off-road driving,  
as well as other hints for driving in various  
weather conditions.  
But driver behavior factors are far more often  
the cause of a utility vehicle rollover than are  
environmental or vehicle factors. Safe driver  
behavior and understanding the environment  
in which you will be driving can help avoid  
a rollover crash in any type of vehicle, including  
utility vehicles.  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Defensive Driving  
{CAUTION:  
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:  
Drive defensively.  
Defensive driving really means “Be ready  
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,  
or expressways, it means “Always expect  
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians  
or other drivers are going to be careless  
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they  
might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions  
are about the most preventable of  
Please start with a very important safety device in  
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They  
Are for Everyone on page 20.  
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow  
enough following distance. Defensive  
driving requires that a driver concentrate  
on the driving task. Anything that distracts  
from the driving task makes proper  
defensive driving more difficult and can  
even cause a collision, with resulting  
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these  
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to  
do them. These simple defensive driving  
techniques could save your life.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half  
the adult population — choose never to drink  
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.  
For persons under 21, it is against the law in  
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good  
medical, psychological, and developmental  
reasons for these laws.  
Drunken Driving  
Death and injury associated with drinking and  
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number one  
contributor to the highway death toll, claiming  
thousands of victims every year.  
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to  
drive a vehicle:  
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway  
safety problem is for people never to drink  
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?  
How much is “too much” if someone plans  
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.  
Although it depends on each person and situation,  
here is some general information on the problem.  
Judgment  
Muscular Coordination  
Vision  
Attentiveness  
Police records show that almost half of all motor  
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most  
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who  
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more  
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths  
have been associated with the use of alcohol,  
with more than 300,000 people injured.  
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of  
someone who is drinking depends upon four things:  
The amount of alcohol consumed  
The drinker’s body weight  
The amount of food that is consumed before  
and during drinking  
The length of time it has taken the drinker to  
consume the alcohol  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
According to the American Medical Association,  
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce  
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up  
with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person  
would reach the same BAC by drinking three  
4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed  
drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of  
liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.  
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,  
if the same person drank three double martinis  
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,  
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.  
A person who consumes food just before or during  
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.  
There is a gender difference, too. Women  
generally have a lower relative percentage of body  
water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body  
water, this means that a woman generally will  
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her  
same body weight will when each has the same  
number of drinks.  
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout  
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.  
In some other countries, the limit is even lower.  
For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France  
and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial  
drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.  
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to  
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have  
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the  
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC  
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving  
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC  
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are  
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC  
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the  
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for  
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.  
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has  
doubled his or her chance of having a collision.  
At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this  
driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at  
a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times  
greater!  
There is something else about drinking and driving  
that many people do not know. Medical research  
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make  
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain,  
spinal cord, or heart. This means that when anyone  
who has been drinking — driver or passenger — is  
in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or  
permanently disabled is higher than if the person  
had not been drinking.  
{CAUTION:  
Drinking and then driving is very  
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,  
attentiveness, and judgment can be  
affected by even a small amount of  
alcohol. You can have a serious — or  
even fatal — collision if you drive after  
drinking. Please do not drink and drive or  
ride with a driver who has been drinking.  
Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a  
group, designate a driver who will not  
drink.  
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the  
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or  
number of cold showers will speed that up.  
“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if  
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden  
action, as when a child darts into the street?  
A person with even a moderate BAC might not  
be able to react quickly enough to avoid the  
collision.  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control of a Vehicle  
Braking  
You have three systems that make your vehicle go  
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the  
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems  
have to do their work at the places where the tires  
meet the road.  
See Brake System Warning Light on page 170.  
Braking action involves perception time and  
reaction time.  
First, you have to decide to push on the brake  
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to  
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.  
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or  
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems  
than the tires and road can provide. That means  
you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction  
Control System (TCS) on page 238.  
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a  
second. But that is only an average. It might  
be less with one driver and as long as two or  
three seconds or more with another. Age, physical  
condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight  
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and  
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,  
a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels  
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an  
emergency, so keeping enough space between  
your vehicle and others is important.  
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your  
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 304.  
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary  
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is  
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,  
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the  
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;  
and the amount of brake force applied.  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people  
drive in spurts — heavy acceleration followed  
by heavy braking — rather than keeping pace  
with traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may  
not have time to cool between hard stops.  
The brakes will wear out much faster if you  
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with  
the traffic and allow realistic following distances,  
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.  
That means better braking and longer brake life.  
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)  
Your vehicle might have the Anti-Lock Brake  
System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking  
system that will help prevent a braking skid.  
If your vehicle has ABS,  
this warning light on the  
instrument panel will  
come on briefly  
when you start your  
vehicle.  
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you  
are driving, brake normally but do not pump the  
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder  
to push down. If the engine stops, you will still  
have some power brake assist. But you will  
use it when you brake. Once the power assist  
is used up, it may take longer to stop and  
the brake pedal will be harder to push.  
When you start the engine, or when you begin  
to drive away, ABS will check itself. You might hear  
a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test  
is going on, and you might even notice that the  
brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.  
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your  
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 304.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than  
any driver could. The computer is programmed  
to make the most of available tire and road  
conditions. This can help you steer around the  
obstacle while braking hard.  
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving  
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of  
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.  
Here is what happens with ABS:  
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.  
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the  
computer will separately work the brakes at  
each wheel.  
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving  
updates on wheel speed and controls braking  
pressure accordingly.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remember: ABS does not change the time you  
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or  
always decrease stopping distance. If you get too  
close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have  
time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly  
slows or stops. Always leave enough room up  
ahead to stop, even though you have ABS.  
Once they do, the vehicle cannot respond to your  
steering. Momentum will carry it in whatever  
direction it was headed when the wheels stopped  
rolling. That could be off the road, into the very  
thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.  
If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” braking  
technique. This will give you maximum braking  
while maintaining steering control. You can do this  
by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily  
increasing pressure.  
Using ABS  
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake  
pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.  
You might feel a slight brake pedal pulsation  
or notice some noise, but this is normal.  
In an emergency, you will probably want to  
squeeze the brakes hard without locking the  
wheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding,  
ease off the brake pedal. This will help you  
retain steering control. If you do have ABS, it is  
on page 235.  
Braking in Emergencies  
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a  
situation that requires hard braking.  
If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at the  
same time. However, if you do not have ABS,  
your first reaction — to hit the brake pedal  
hard and hold it down — might be the wrong  
thing to do. Your wheels can stop rolling.  
In many emergencies, steering can help you more  
than even the very best braking.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
But you can turn the traction control system off if  
you ever need to. You should turn the system  
off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud,  
ice or snow and rocking the vehicle is required.  
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 276 for more  
information.  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
Your vehicle may have a traction control system  
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful  
in slippery road conditions. The system operates  
only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels  
are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When  
this happens, the system reduces engine power to  
limit wheel spin.  
If your vehicle is  
equipped with the  
2.2L L4 engine, the  
traction control system  
can be turned off by  
pressing the traction  
control button.  
This light will come on  
when your traction  
control system is  
limiting wheel spin.  
It is located on the instrument panel above the  
audio system.  
See Low Traction Light on page 173. You may  
feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the 3.5L V6 engine,  
the traction control system will be turned off when  
the shift lever is in REVERSE (R) or LOW (L).  
The traction control system warning light will be  
displayed on the instrument panel. See Traction  
for more information.  
The traction control system automatically comes  
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit  
wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions,  
you should always leave the system on.  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The traction control system can be activated again  
by pressing the traction control button for the  
2.2L L4 engine, or by selecting DRIVE (D)  
or INTERMEDIATE (I) for the 3.5L V6 engine.  
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System  
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the  
AWD system operates automatically without any  
action required by the driver. If the front drive  
wheels begin to slip, the rear wheels will  
automatically begin to drive the vehicle as  
required. There may be a slight engagement  
noise during hard use but this is normal.  
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press  
the button, the system will not turn off until there  
is no longer a current need to limit wheel spin.  
You can turn the system back on at any time by  
pressing the button again. If the traction control  
warning light does not come on, you may not have  
traction control and your vehicle should be  
serviced at a retailer.  
During heavy AWD applications, the engine  
torque may be reduced to protect AWD system  
components. If the vehicle is exposed to extended  
heavy AWD usage, the AWD system will shut  
itself off to protect the system from overheating.  
When the system cools down, the AWD system  
will activate itself again automatically; this  
cool-down can take up to 20 minutes depending  
on outside temperature and vehicle use.  
Adding non-Saturn accessories can affect your  
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and  
Modifications on page 304 for more information.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Steering Tips  
Steering  
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.  
Electric Power Steering  
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned  
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:  
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the  
power steering assist system will continue  
to operate until you are able to stop your vehicle.  
If you lose power steering assist because the  
electric power steering system is not functioning,  
you can steer, but it will take more effort.  
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is  
subject to the same laws of physics when driving  
on curves. The traction of the tires against the  
road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to  
change its path when you turn the front wheels.  
If there is no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle  
going in the same direction. If you have ever  
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will  
understand this.  
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction  
several times until it stops, or hold the steering  
wheel in the stopped position for an extended  
amount of time, you may notice a reduced amount  
of power steering assist. The normal amount of  
power steering assist should return shortly after a  
few normal steering movements.  
The traction you can get in a curve depends on  
the condition of the tires and the road surface,  
the angle at which the curve is banked, and your  
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the  
one factor you can control.  
The electric power steering system does not  
require regular maintenance. If you suspect  
steering system problems and/or the Service  
Vehicle Soon light comes on, contact your  
dealer/retailer for service repairs.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.  
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both  
control systems — steering and braking — have  
to do their work where the tires meet the road.  
Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,  
adding the hard braking can demand too much  
of those places. You can lose control.  
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you  
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted  
speeds are based on good weather and road  
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you  
will want to go slower.  
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach  
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while  
the front wheels are straight ahead.  
The same thing can happen if you are steering  
through a sharp curve and you suddenly  
accelerate. Those two control systems — steering  
and acceleration — can overwhelm those places  
where the tires meet the road and make you lose  
page 238.  
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”  
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady  
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of  
the curve, and then accelerate gently into  
the straightaway.  
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can  
affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories  
and Modifications on page 304.  
What should you do if this ever happens?  
Ease up on the brake or accelerator pedal,  
steer the vehicle the way you want it to go,  
and slow down.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Steering in Emergencies  
There are times when steering can be more  
effective than braking. For example, you come  
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,  
or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or  
a child darts out from between parked cars and  
stops right in front of you. You can avoid these  
problems by braking — if you can stop in time.  
But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.  
That is the time for evasive action — steering  
around the problem.  
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies  
like these. First apply the brakes — but, unless  
you have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock the  
wheels. See Braking on page 234. It is better  
to remove as much speed as you can from  
a possible collision. Then steer around the  
problem, to the left or right depending on the  
space available.  
An emergency like this requires close attention and  
a quick decision. If you are holding the steering  
wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock  
positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very  
quickly without removing either hand. But you  
have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly  
straighten the wheel once you have avoided the  
object.  
The fact that such emergency situations are  
always possible is a good reason to practice  
defensive driving at all times and wear safety  
belts properly.  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Off-Road Recovery  
Passing  
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have  
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder  
while you are driving.  
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a  
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,  
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then  
goes back into the right lane again. A simple  
maneuver?  
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a  
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,  
since the passing vehicle occupies the same  
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.  
A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief  
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly  
put the passing driver face to face with the worst  
of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.  
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the  
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off  
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the  
way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge  
of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel  
up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire  
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the  
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
So here are some tips for passing:  
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming  
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right  
lane and do not get too close. Time your move  
so you will be increasing speed as the time  
comes to move into the other lane. If the way  
is clear to pass, you will have a running  
Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the  
sides, and to crossroads for situations  
that might affect your passing patterns. If you  
have any doubt whatsoever about making  
a successful pass, wait for a better time.  
start that more than makes up for the distance  
you would lose by dropping back. And if  
something happens to cause you to cancel  
your pass, you need only slow down and drop  
back again and wait for another opportunity.  
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,  
and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead  
that might indicate a turn or an intersection,  
delay your pass. A broken center line  
usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing  
the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid  
line on your side of the lane or a double solid  
line, even if the road seems empty of  
approaching traffic.  
If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow  
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that  
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull  
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to  
glance over your shoulder and check the  
blind spot.  
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want  
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.  
For one thing, following too closely reduces  
your area of vision, especially if you are  
following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not  
have adequate space if the vehicle ahead  
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a  
reasonable distance.  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your  
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal  
before moving out of the right lane to pass.  
When you are far enough ahead of the passed  
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside  
mirror, activate the right lane change signal and  
move back into the right lane. Remember that  
an outside convex mirror makes the vehicle  
you just passed seem farther away from you  
than it really is.  
Loss of Control  
Let us review what driving experts say about what  
happens when the three control systems — brakes,  
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough  
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the  
driver has asked.  
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to  
steer and constantly seek an escape route or  
area of less danger.  
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time  
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing  
the next vehicle.  
Skidding  
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.  
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking  
reasonable care suited to existing conditions,  
and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids  
are always possible.  
Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too  
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not  
flashing, it might be slowing down or starting to  
turn.  
The three types of skids correspond to your  
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,  
the wheels are not rolling. In the steering or  
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a  
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.  
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle  
causes the driving wheels to spin.  
If you are being passed, make it easy for  
the following driver to get ahead of you.  
Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your  
foot off the accelerator pedal.  
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,  
try your best to avoid sudden steering,  
acceleration, or braking, including reducing  
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear.  
Any sudden changes could cause the tires to  
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery  
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize  
warning clues — such as enough water, ice,  
or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored  
surface — and slow down when you have any  
doubt.  
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS),  
remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration  
page 238. If you do not have this system, or if  
the system is off, then an acceleration skid is  
also best handled by easing your foot off  
the accelerator pedal.  
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off  
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the  
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start  
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may  
straighten out. Always be ready for a  
second skid if it occurs.  
If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),  
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid.  
If you do not have ABS, then in a braking  
skid, where the wheels are no longer rolling,  
release enough pressure on the brakes to get  
the wheels rolling again. This restores steering  
control. Push the brake pedal down steadily  
when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the  
wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.  
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,  
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.  
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust  
your driving to these conditions. It is important  
to slow down on slippery surfaces because  
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle  
control more limited.  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
“Off-roading” means you have left the North  
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are  
not marked. Curves are not banked. There are  
no road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough,  
uphill, or downhill. In short, you have gone  
right back to nature.  
Off-Road Driving  
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have  
all-wheel drive. If your vehicle does not have  
all-wheel drive, you should not drive off-road  
unless you are on a level, solid surface.  
Many of the same design features that help make  
your vehicle responsive on paved roads during  
poor weather conditions — features like all-wheel  
drive — help make it much better suited for off-road  
use. Its higher ground clearance also helps your  
vehicle step over some off-road obstacles. But  
your vehicle does not have features like special  
underbody shielding and a transfer case low gear  
range, things that are usually thought necessary for  
extended or severe off-road service.  
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And  
that is why it is very important that you read  
this guide. You will find many driving tips and  
suggestions. These will help make your off-road  
driving safer and more enjoyable.  
Before You Go Off-Roading  
There are some things to do before you go out.  
For example, be sure to have all necessary  
maintenance and service work done. Is there  
enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the  
fluid levels up where they should be? What are  
the local laws that apply to off-roading where you  
will be driving? If you do not know, you should  
check with law enforcement people in the area.  
Will you be on someone’s private land? If so,  
be sure to get the necessary permission.  
Also, see Braking on page 234.  
The airbag system is designed to work properly  
under a wide range of conditions, including off-road  
usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especially  
on rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.  
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does  
have some definite hazards. The greatest of these  
is the terrain itself.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
There are some important things to remember  
about how to load your vehicle.  
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road  
Driving  
The heaviest things should be on the  
load floor and forward of the rear axle.  
Put heavier items as far forward as you can.  
{CAUTION:  
Be sure the load is secured properly, so  
driving on the off-road terrain does not  
toss things around.  
Cargo on the load floor piled higher  
than the seatbacks can be thrown  
forward during a sudden stop. You or  
your passengers could be injured.  
Keep cargo below the top of the  
seatbacks.  
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can  
be tossed about when driving over  
rough terrain. You or your passengers  
can be struck by flying objects.  
Secure the cargo properly.  
You will find other important information in this  
manual. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279,  
Roof Rack System on page 134, and Tires on  
page 366.  
Heavy loads on the roof raise the  
vehicle’s center of gravity, making it  
more likely to roll over. You can be  
seriously or fatally injured if the  
vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads  
inside the cargo area, not on the roof.  
Keep cargo in the cargo area as far  
forward and low as possible.  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Take extreme care with open fires where  
permitted, camp stoves, and lanterns.  
Environmental Concerns  
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and  
satisfying recreation. However, it also raises  
environmental concerns. We recognize these  
concerns and urge every off-roader to follow these  
basic rules for protecting the environment:  
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or  
other combustible materials that could  
catch fire from the heat of the vehicle’s  
exhaust system.  
Always use established trails, roads, and areas  
that have been specially set aside for public  
off-road recreational driving; obey all posted  
regulations.  
Traveling to Remote Areas  
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when  
going to a remote area. Know the terrain and  
plan your route. You are much less likely to get  
bad surprises. Get accurate maps of trails  
and terrain. Try to learn of any blocked or  
closed roads.  
Avoid any driving practice that could damage  
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,  
grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includes  
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees, or  
unnecessary driving through streams or  
over soft ground.  
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one  
other vehicle. If something happens to one  
of them, the other can help quickly.  
Always carry a litter bag — make sure all  
refuse is removed from any campsite  
before leaving.  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Here are some things to keep in mind. At higher  
speeds:  
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving  
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is  
safe and close to home before you go into the  
wilderness. Off-road driving does require some new  
and different driving skills. Here is what we mean.  
You approach things faster and you have less  
time to scan the terrain for obstacles.  
You have less time to react.  
You have more vehicle bounce when you  
drive over obstacles.  
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.  
Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep  
the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears  
need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds.  
With your arms, hands, feet, and body, you  
will need to respond to vibrations and vehicle  
bounce.  
You will need more distance for braking,  
especially since you are on an unpaved  
surface.  
{CAUTION:  
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful  
off-road driving. One of the best ways to  
control your vehicle is to control your speed.  
When you are driving off-road, bouncing  
and quick changes in direction can easily  
throw you out of position. This could  
cause you to lose control and crash. So,  
whether you are driving on or off the road,  
you and your passengers should wear  
safety belts.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles  
can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or  
bump can startle you if you are not prepared  
for them. Often these obstacles are hidden by  
grass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and fall of  
the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:  
Scanning the Terrain  
Off-road driving can take you over many different  
kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with  
the terrain and its many different features.  
Here are some things to consider.  
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you  
over hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,  
mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces affects  
the steering, acceleration, and braking of your  
vehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kind  
of surface you are on, you may experience slipping,  
sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor  
traction, and longer braking distances.  
Is the path ahead clear?  
Will the surface texture change abruptly  
up ahead?  
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?  
There is more discussion of these subjects  
later.  
Will you have to stop suddenly or change  
direction quickly?  
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain,  
keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts,  
troughs, or other surface features can jerk  
the wheel out of your hands if you are not  
prepared.  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other  
obstacles, the wheels can leave the ground.  
If this happens, even with one or two wheels,  
you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all.  
Driving on Off-Road Hills  
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or  
across a hill. Driving safely on hills requires  
good judgment and understanding of what your  
vehicle can and cannot do. There are some  
hills that simply cannot be driven, no matter  
how well built the vehicle.  
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is  
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,  
sudden turns, or sudden braking.  
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind  
of alertness from driving on paved roads and  
highways. There are no road signs, posted speed  
limits, or signal lights. You have to use your  
own good judgment about what is safe and  
what is not.  
{CAUTION:  
Many hills are simply too steep for any  
vehicle. If you drive up them, you will  
stall. If you drive down them, you cannot  
control your speed. If you drive across  
them, you will roll over. You could be  
seriously injured or killed. If you have any  
doubt about the steepness, do not drive  
the hill.  
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on  
any road. And this is certainly true for off-road  
driving. At the very time you need special alertness  
and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions,  
and judgment can be affected by even a small  
amount of alcohol. You could have a serious — or  
even fatal — accident if you drink and drive or  
ride with a driver who has been drinking.  
See Drunken Driving on page 231.  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Is there a straight path up or down the hill so  
you will not have to make turning maneuvers?  
Approaching a Hill  
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it  
is one of those hills that is just too steep to climb,  
descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.  
On a very small hill, for example, there may be a  
smooth, constant incline with only a small change in  
elevation where you can easily see all the way to  
the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper  
as you near the top, but you may not see this  
because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes,  
grass, or shrubs.  
Are there obstructions on the hill that can  
block your path, such as boulders, trees, logs,  
or ruts?  
What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an  
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out  
and walk the hill if you do not know. It is the  
smart way to find out.  
Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often  
have ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed  
rocks because they are more susceptible  
to the effects of erosion.  
Here are some other things to consider as you  
approach a hill.  
Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get  
sharply steeper in places?  
Is there good traction on the hillside, or will  
the surface cause tire slipping?  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ease up on the speed as you approach the  
top of the hill.  
Driving Uphill  
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill,  
you need to take some special steps.  
Attach a flag to the vehicle to make it more  
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.  
Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the  
steering wheel.  
Sound the horn as you approach the top of the  
hill to let opposing traffic know you are there.  
Get a smooth start up the hill and try to  
maintain speed. Do not use more power  
than you need, because you do not want  
the wheels to start spinning or sliding.  
Use your headlamps even during the day.  
They make your vehicle more visible to  
oncoming traffic.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full  
speed can cause an accident. There could  
be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even  
another vehicle. You could be seriously  
injured or killed. As you near the top of a  
hill, slow down and stay alert.  
Turning or driving across steep hills can  
be dangerous. You could lose traction,  
slide sideways, and possibly roll over.  
You could be seriously injured or killed.  
When driving up hills, always try to go  
straight up.  
Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.  
If the path twists and turns, you might want to  
find another route.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
As you are backing down the hill, put your left  
hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock  
position. This way you will be able to tell if the  
wheels are straight and maneuver as you back  
down. It is best that you back down the hill with  
the wheels straight rather than in the left or right  
direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or  
right will increase the possibility of a rollover.  
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is  
about to stall, and I cannot make it up  
the hill?  
A: If this happens, there are some things you  
should do, and there are some things you must  
not do. First, here is what you should do:  
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and  
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the  
parking brake.  
Here are some things you must not do if you stall,  
or are about to stall, when going up a hill.  
If the engine is still running, shift the transaxle  
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,  
and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).  
Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into  
NEUTRAL (N), or pressing the clutch if you  
have a manual transaxle, to rev-up the engine  
and regain forward momentum. This will not  
work. Your vehicle will roll backwards very  
quickly and you could go out of control.  
If the engine has stopped running, you will  
need to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed  
and the parking brake still applied, shift the  
transaxle to PARK (P), or shift to NEUTRAL if  
you have a manual transaxle, and restart the  
engine. Then shift to REVERSE (R), release  
the parking brake, and slowly back down the  
hill as straight as possible in REVERSE (R).  
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the  
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to  
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and  
slowly back straight down.  
Never attempt to turn around if you are about to  
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep  
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough  
to cause it to roll over if you turn around. If you  
cannot make it up the hill you must back  
straight down the hill.  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then  
try to keep your vehicle headed straight down, and  
use a low gear. This way, engine drag can help  
the brakes and they will not have to do all  
the work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicle  
under control at all times.  
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down  
the hill and decide I just cannot do it.  
What should I do?  
A: Set the parking brake, put your transaxle in  
PARK (P), or FIRST (1) if your vehicle has a  
manual transaxle, and turn off the engine.  
Leave the vehicle and go get some help.  
Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the  
path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill.  
{CAUTION:  
Heavy braking when going down a hill can  
cause your brakes to overheat and fade.  
This could cause loss of control and a  
serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly  
when descending a hill and use a low  
gear to keep vehicle speed under control.  
Driving Downhill  
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want  
to consider a number of things:  
How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to  
maintain vehicle control?  
What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?  
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?  
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?  
Logs? Boulders?  
What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a  
hidden creek bank or even a river bottom  
with large rocks?  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Q: Are there some things I should not do  
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?  
A: It is much more likely to happen going  
uphill. But if it happens going downhill,  
here is what to do.  
when driving down a hill?  
A: Yes! These are important because if you  
ignore them you could lose control and  
have a serious accident.  
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular  
brakes. Apply the parking brake.  
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take  
you across the incline of the hill. A hill that  
is not too steep to drive down may be  
2. Shift to PARK (P), or NEUTRAL if you have  
a manual transaxle, and, while still braking,  
restart the engine.  
too steep to drive across. Your vehicle could  
roll over if you do not drive straight down.  
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking  
brake, and drive straight down.  
Never go downhill with the transaxle in  
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free wheeling.”  
The brakes will have to do all the work  
and could overheat and fade.  
4. If the engine will not start, get out and  
get help.  
Unless your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, avoid  
braking so hard that you lock the wheels when  
going downhill. If the wheels are locked, you  
cannot steer your vehicle. If the wheels lock up  
during downhill braking, you may feel the  
vehicle starting to slide sideways. To regain  
your direction, just ease off the brakes and  
steer to keep the front of the vehicle pointing  
straight downhill.  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
But when you drive across an incline, the  
much more narrow track width — the distance  
between the left and right wheels — may not  
prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.  
Also, driving across an incline puts more weight  
on the downhill wheels. This could cause a  
downhill slide or a rollover.  
Driving Across an Incline  
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably  
go across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you  
have to decide whether to try to drive across  
the incline. Here are some things to consider:  
Surface conditions can be a problem when  
you drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy  
spots, or even wet grass can cause your  
tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle  
slips sideways, it can hit something that will  
trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.  
{CAUTION:  
Driving across an incline that is too steep  
will make your vehicle roll over. You could  
be seriously injured or killed. If you have  
any doubt about the steepness of the  
incline, do not drive across it. Find another  
route instead.  
Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of  
the incline even worse. If you drive across a  
rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill  
wheels drop into a rut or depression, your  
vehicle can tilt even more.  
A hill that can be driven straight up or down  
may be too steep to drive across. When you  
go straight up or down a hill, the length of the  
wheel base — the distance from the front  
wheels to the rear wheels — reduces the  
likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end.  
For reasons like these, you need to decide  
carefully whether to try to drive across an incline.  
Just because the trail goes across the incline  
does not mean you have to drive it. The last  
vehicle to try it might have rolled over.  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stalling on an Incline  
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that  
is not too steep, but I hit some loose  
gravel and start to slide downhill.  
What should I do?  
{CAUTION:  
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide  
sideways, turn downhill. This should help  
straighten out the vehicle and prevent the  
side slipping. However, a much better way  
to prevent this is to get out and “walk  
the course” so you know what the surface is  
like before you drive it.  
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of  
a vehicle stopped across an incline is  
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you  
could be crushed or killed. Always get out  
on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and  
stay well clear of the rollover path.  
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an  
incline, be sure you, and any passengers, get  
out on the uphill side, even if the door there  
is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill  
side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you will be  
right in its path.  
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the  
path the vehicle will take if it does roll over.  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire  
traction. On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose  
control. On wet ice, for example, the traction is  
so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating.  
And, if you do get moving, poor steering and  
difficult braking can cause you to slide out  
of control.  
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice  
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels  
will not get good traction. You cannot accelerate  
as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you  
will need longer braking distances.  
It is best to use a low gear when you are in  
mud —the deeper the mud, the lower the gear.  
In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle  
moving so you do not get stuck.  
{CAUTION:  
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change  
in wheel traction. But it will depend upon how  
loosely packed the sand is. On loosely packed  
sand, such as on beaches or sand dunes,  
your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has  
an effect on steering, accelerating, and braking.  
Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or  
abrupt maneuvers.  
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers  
can be dangerous. Underwater springs,  
currents under the ice, or sudden thaws  
can weaken the ice. Your vehicle could  
fall through the ice and you and your  
passengers could drown. Drive your  
vehicle on safe surfaces only.  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Find out how deep the water is before you drive  
through it. If it is deep enough to cover the  
wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do not  
try it — you probably will not get through.  
Also, water that deep can damage the axle  
and other vehicle parts.  
Driving in Water  
{CAUTION:  
Driving through rushing water can be  
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your  
vehicle downstream and you and your  
passengers could drown. If it is only  
shallow water, it can still wash away the  
ground from under your tires, and you  
could lose traction and roll the vehicle  
over. Do not drive through rushing water.  
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.  
At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition  
system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also  
occur if you get the tailpipe under water. And,  
as long as the tailpipe is under water, you will  
never be able to start the engine. When you go  
through water, remember that when the brakes get  
wet, it may take you longer to stop.  
page 264 for more information on driving  
through water.  
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood  
waters demand extreme caution.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After Off-Road Driving  
Driving at Night  
Remove any brush or debris that has collected  
on the underbody, chassis, or under the hood.  
These accumulations can be a fire hazard.  
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.  
One reason is that some drivers are likely to  
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night  
vision problems, or by fatigue.  
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake  
linings cleaned and checked. These substances  
can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the  
body structure, steering, suspension, wheels,  
tires, and exhaust system for damage. Also, check  
the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.  
Here are some tips on night driving.  
Drive defensively.  
Do not drink and drive.  
Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the  
glare from headlamps behind you.  
Your vehicle will require more frequent service  
due to off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance  
Schedule for additional information.  
Since you cannot see as well, slow down and  
keep more space between you and other  
vehicles.  
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.  
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so  
much road ahead.  
In remote areas, watch for animals.  
If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe  
place and rest.  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.  
But as we get older these differences increase.  
A 50-year-old driver might require at least twice as  
much light to see the same thing at night as a  
20-year-old.  
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your  
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is  
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the  
inside of the glass can build up a film caused  
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash  
more than clean glass would, making the pupils  
of your eyes contract repeatedly.  
What you do in the daytime can also affect your  
night vision. For example, if you spend the  
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear  
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble  
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not  
wear sunglasses at night. They might cut down on  
glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot  
of things invisible.  
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a  
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your  
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly  
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be  
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your  
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer  
from night blindness — the inability to see in  
dim light — and are not even aware of it.  
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching  
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or  
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust  
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,  
as from a driver who does not lower the high  
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,  
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into  
the approaching headlamps.  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you  
will get even less traction. It is always wise to  
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall  
while you are driving. The surface may get wet  
suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving  
on dry pavement.  
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads  
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.  
Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good  
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see  
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,  
the edge of the road, and even people walking.  
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in  
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid  
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your  
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of  
streaking or missing areas on the windshield,  
or when strips of rubber start to separate from  
the inserts.  
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.  
On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate,  
or turn as well because your tire-to-road  
traction is not as good as on dry roads.  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hydroplaning  
{CAUTION:  
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can  
build up under your tires that they can actually ride  
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet  
enough and you are going fast enough. When your  
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact  
with the road.  
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They  
may not work as well in a quick stop and  
may cause pulling to one side. You could  
lose control of the vehicle.  
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can  
if your tires do not have much tread or if the  
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if  
a lot of water is standing on the road. If you  
can see reflections from trees, telephone poles,  
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s  
surface, there could be hydroplaning.  
After driving through a large puddle of  
water or a car wash, apply the brake pedal  
lightly until the brakes work normally.  
Driving too fast through large water puddles or  
even going through some car washes can cause  
problems, too. The water may affect your brakes.  
Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot,  
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.  
There just is not a hard and fast rule about  
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down  
when it is raining.  
try to slow down before you hit them.  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Driving Through Deep Standing Water  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Notice: If you drive too quickly through  
deep puddles or standing water, water can  
come in through the engine’s air intake  
and badly damage the engine. Never drive  
through water that is slightly lower than the  
underbody of your vehicle. If you cannot  
avoid deep puddles or standing water,  
drive through them very slowly.  
If this happens, you and other vehicle  
occupants could drown. Do not ignore  
police warning signs, and otherwise be  
very cautious about trying to drive  
through flowing water.  
Driving Through Flowing Water  
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips  
Besides slowing down, allow some extra  
following distance. And be especially  
careful when you pass another vehicle.  
Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and  
be prepared to have your view restricted  
by road spray.  
{CAUTION:  
Flowing or rushing water creates strong  
forces. If you try to drive through flowing  
water, as you might at a low water  
crossing, your vehicle can be carried  
away. As little as six inches of flowing  
water can carry away a smaller vehicle.  
Have good tires with proper tread depth.  
See Tires on page 366.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Here are ways to increase your safety in city  
driving:  
City Driving  
Know the best way to get to where you are  
going. Get a city map and plan your trip  
into an unknown part of the city just as you  
would for a cross-country trip.  
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross  
most large cities. You will save time and  
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 268.  
Treat a green light as a warning signal.  
A traffic light is there because the corner  
is busy enough to need it. When a light turns  
green, and just before you start to move,  
check both ways for vehicles that have not  
cleared the intersection or may be running the  
red light.  
One of the biggest problems with city streets is  
the amount of traffic on them. You will want  
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing  
and pay attention to traffic signals.  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The most important advice on freeway driving  
is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive  
at the same speed most of the other drivers are  
driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a  
smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway  
as a passing lane.  
Freeway Driving  
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads  
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the  
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp,  
you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine  
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to  
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.  
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and  
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.  
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.  
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed  
to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it  
is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want  
to pass.  
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,  
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or  
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.  
But they have their own special rules.  
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.  
Then use your turn signal.  
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly  
over your shoulder to make sure there is not  
another vehicle in your blind spot.  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Once you are moving on the freeway, make  
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.  
Expect to move slightly slower at night.  
Of course, you will find experienced and able  
service experts at dealers/retailers all across the  
United States and Canada. They are ready  
and willing to help if you need it.  
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the  
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your  
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and  
back up. Drive on to the next exit.  
Here are some things you can check before a trip:  
Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir  
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?  
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite  
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted.  
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?  
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you  
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer,  
not to your sense of motion. After driving for any  
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think  
you are going slower than you actually are.  
checked all levels?  
Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses  
clean?  
Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,  
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough  
for long-distance driving? Are the tires  
all inflated to the recommended pressure?  
Before Leaving on a Long Trip  
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.  
If you must start when you are not fresh — such as  
after a day’s work — do not plan to make too many  
miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable  
clothing and shoes you can easily drive in.  
Weather Forecasts: What is the weather  
outlook along your route? Should you  
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major  
storm system?  
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it  
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it  
needs service, have it done before starting out.  
Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you get sleepy, pull off the road into  
a rest, service, or parking area and take a  
nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety,  
treat drowsiness on the highway as an  
emergency.  
Highway Hypnosis  
Is there actually such a condition as highway  
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the  
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of  
awareness, or whatever.  
Hill and Mountain Roads  
There is something about an easy stretch of  
road with the same scenery, along with the  
hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the  
engine, and the rush of the wind against the  
vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let it  
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave  
the road in less than a second, and you could  
crash and be injured.  
What can you do about highway hypnosis?  
First, be aware that it can happen.  
Then here are some tips:  
Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,  
with a comfortably cool interior.  
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road  
ahead and to the sides. Check your rearview  
mirrors and your instruments frequently.  
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different  
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are  
planning to visit there, here are some tips that  
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.  
{CAUTION:  
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check  
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,  
cooling system, and transaxle. These parts  
can work hard on mountain roads.  
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with  
the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes  
will have to do all the work of slowing  
down. They could get so hot that they  
would not work well. You would then have  
poor braking or even none going down a  
hill. You could crash. Always have the  
engine running and your vehicle in gear  
when you go downhill.  
{CAUTION:  
If you do not shift down, the brakes could  
get so hot that they would not work well.  
You would then have poor braking or  
even none going down a hill. You could  
crash. Shift down to let the engine assist  
the brakes on a steep downhill slope.  
Know how to go down hills. The most important  
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of  
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when  
you go down a steep or long hill.  
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift  
down to a lower gear. The lower gears help  
cool your engine and transaxle, and you can  
climb the hill better.  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane  
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide  
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at  
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.  
Winter Driving  
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There  
could be something in your lane, like a stalled  
car or an accident.  
You may see highway signs on mountains that  
warn of special problems. Examples are long  
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling  
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these  
and take appropriate action.  
Here are some tips for winter driving:  
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.  
You may want to put winter emergency  
supplies in your vehicle.  
Also see Tires on page 366.  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,  
a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some  
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,  
a red cloth, and reflective warning triangles.  
And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,  
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old  
carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to help provide  
traction. Be sure you properly secure these  
items in your vehicle.  
Driving on Snow or Ice  
Most of the time, those places where the tires  
meet the road probably have good traction.  
However, if there is snow or ice between the  
tires and the road, you can have a very slippery  
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or  
grip, and will need to be very careful.  
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold  
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.  
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it  
may offer the least traction of all. You can get  
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and  
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving  
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.  
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,  
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile  
traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels  
will spin and polish the surface under the tires  
even more.  
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard  
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be  
in a serious situation. You should probably stay with  
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are  
near help and you can hike through the snow. Here  
are some things to do to summon help and keep  
yourself and your passengers safe:  
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your  
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop  
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,  
you will want to begin stopping sooner than  
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake  
System (ABS) on page 235.  
Turn on your hazard flashers.  
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that  
you have been stopped by the snow.  
Allow greater following distance on any  
slippery road.  
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket  
around you. If you do not have blankets  
or extra clothing, make body insulators  
from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,  
floor mats — anything you can wrap around  
yourself or tuck under your clothing to  
keep warm.  
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be  
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.  
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may  
appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot  
reach, such as around clumps of trees, behind  
buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the  
surface of a curve or an overpass may remain  
icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you  
see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before  
you are on it. Try not to brake while you are  
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering  
maneuvers.  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your  
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO  
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.  
CO could overcome you and kill you.  
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might  
not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away  
snow from around the base of your  
vehicle, especially any that is blocking the  
exhaust pipe. And check around again  
from time to time to be sure snow does  
not collect there.  
Open a window just a little on the side of  
the vehicle that is away from the wind.  
This will help keep CO out.  
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be  
careful.  
Run your engine only as long as you must.  
This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it  
go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the  
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat  
that you get and it keeps the battery charged.  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the  
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with  
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.  
{CAUTION:  
Then, shut the engine off and close the window  
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start  
the engine again and repeat this only when you  
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it  
as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long  
as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out  
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous  
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high  
speed, they can explode, and you or others  
could be injured. And, the transaxle or  
other parts of the vehicle can overheat.  
That could cause an engine compartment  
fire or other damage. When you are stuck,  
spin the wheels as little as possible. Do not  
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as  
shown on the speedometer.  
exercises every half hour or so until help comes.  
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,  
Mud, Ice, or Snow  
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy parts  
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you  
spin the wheels too fast while shifting  
the transaxle back and forth, you can destroy  
the transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to  
Get It Out on page 277.  
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,  
you will need to spin the wheels, but you do not  
want to spin your wheels too fast. The method  
known as rocking can help you get out when you  
are stuck, but you must use caution.  
For information about using tire chains on your  
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 384.  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out  
Recovery Hook  
First, turn the steering wheel left and right.  
That will clear the area around the front wheels.  
If your vehicle has traction control, you should turn  
on page 238. Then shift back and forth between  
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, or with a  
manual transaxle, between FIRST (1) or  
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning  
the wheels as little as possible. Release the  
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly  
on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is  
in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in the  
forward and reverse directions, you will cause  
a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that  
does not get your vehicle out after a few tries,  
it may need to be towed out. Or, you can  
{CAUTION:  
The recovery hook, when used, is under  
a lot of force. Always pull the vehicle  
straight out. Never pull on the hook at a  
sideways angle. The hook could break off  
and you or others could be injured from  
the chain or cable snapping back.  
Notice: Never use the recovery hook to tow  
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged  
and it would not be covered by warranty.  
Contact your dealer/retailer if you would like to  
have a recovery hook installed on your vehicle.  
use the recovery hook if your vehicle has one.  
If your vehicle does need to be towed out,  
see Towing Your Vehicle on page 284.  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The recovery hook is located at the rear of your  
vehicle. It can only be used for pulling the vehicle  
out if it is stuck, not for towing the vehicle.  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire and Loading Information Label  
Loading Your Vehicle  
It is very important to know how much weight your  
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle  
capacity weight and includes the weight of all  
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed  
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much  
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading  
Information label and the Certification/Tire label.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than  
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),  
or either the maximum front or rear Gross  
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,  
parts on your vehicle can break, and it  
can change the way your vehicle handles.  
These could cause you to lose control  
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten  
the life of your vehicle.  
Example Label  
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information  
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).  
With the driver’s door open, you will find the  
label attached below the door lock post (striker).  
The tire and loading information label shows  
the number of occupant seating positions (A),  
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in  
kilograms and pounds.  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows  
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and  
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).  
For more information on tires and inflation see  
page 374.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.  
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals  
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb  
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of  
available cargo and luggage load capacity is  
650 lbs (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).  
There is also important loading information on the  
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and  
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the  
front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”  
later in this section.  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage  
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.  
That weight may not safely exceed the  
available cargo and luggage load capacity  
calculated in Step 4.  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load  
from your trailer will be transferred to your  
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how  
this reduces the available cargo and luggage  
load capacity of your vehicle.  
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo should never  
exceed XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers that will be riding in your  
vehicle.  
See Towing a Trailer on page 290 for important  
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules  
and trailering tips.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver  
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 1  
Description  
Example 2  
Description  
Item  
Total  
Item  
Total  
Vehicle Capacity Weight  
for Example 1 =  
Vehicle Capacity Weight  
for Example 2 =  
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)  
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)  
Subtract Occupant Weight  
Subtract Occupant Weight  
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)  
700 lbs (317 kg)  
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)  
250 lbs (113 kg)  
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =  
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =  
Available Occupant and  
Cargo Weight =  
Available Occupant and  
Cargo Weight =  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Certification/Tire Label  
Example 3  
Description  
Item  
Total  
Vehicle Capacity Weight  
for Example 3 =  
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)  
Subtract Occupant Weight  
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is  
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)  
0 lbs (0 kg)  
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =  
attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door.  
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your  
vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight  
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of  
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailer  
tongue weight, if your vehicle is pulling a trailer.  
Available Occupant and  
Cargo Weight =  
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information  
label for specific information about your vehicle’s  
capacity weight and seating positions.  
The combined weight of the driver, passengers  
and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s  
maximum vehicle capacity weight.  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the  
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,  
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).  
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear  
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and  
weigh your vehicle. Your retailer can help you with  
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on  
both sides of the centerline.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than  
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),  
or either the maximum front or rear Gross  
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,  
parts on your vehicle can break, and it  
can change the way your vehicle handles.  
These could cause you to lose control  
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten  
the life of your vehicle.  
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the  
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.  
Similar looking vehicles may have different  
GVWRs and payloads. Please consult your  
vehicle’s Certification/Tire label or your retailer  
for additional details.  
Using heavier suspension components to get  
added durability might not change your vehicle’s  
weight ratings. Ask your retailer to help you  
load your vehicle correctly if you are using these  
components.  
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause  
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you put things inside your vehicle — like  
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they  
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to  
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will  
keep going.  
Towing  
Towing Your Vehicle  
Consult your retailer or a professional towing  
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle  
page 445.  
{CAUTION:  
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another  
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as  
behind a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle  
Towing” following.  
Things you put inside your vehicle can  
strike and injure people in a sudden stop  
or turn, or in a crash.  
Put things in the cargo area of your  
vehicle. Try to spread the weight  
evenly.  
Never stack heavier things, like  
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that  
some of them are above the tops of  
the seats.  
Do not leave an unsecured child  
restraint in your vehicle.  
When you carry something inside the  
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.  
Do not leave a seat folded down  
unless you need to.  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Here are some important things to consider before  
you do recreational vehicle towing:  
Recreational Vehicle Towing  
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your  
vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind  
a motorhome. The two most common types of  
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy  
towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels on  
the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing your vehicle  
with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up  
on a device known as a “dolly”).  
What’s the towing capacity of the towing  
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle  
manufacturer’s recommendations.  
How far will you tow? Some vehicles have  
restrictions on how far and how long they  
can tow.  
Do you have the proper towing equipment?  
See your dealer/retailer or trailering  
professional for additional advice and  
equipment recommendations.  
With the proper preparation and equipment,  
many vehicles can be towed in these ways.  
See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following  
in this section.  
Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as  
you would prepare your vehicle for a long  
trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is  
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on  
a Long Trip on page 269.  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To tow your vehicle from the front with all  
four wheels on the ground, do the following:  
Dinghy Towing  
Front-wheel-drive vehicles equipped with a manual  
transmission, four-speed automatic transmission  
or five-speed automatic transmission may be  
dinghy towed from the front. These vehicles may  
also be towed by putting the front wheels on a  
dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this section.  
1. Position and attach the vehicle to tow it behind  
the recreational vehicle.  
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC.  
3. Turn fog lamps and all accessories off.  
4. If your vehicle has the manual transmission,  
shift your transmission to NEUTRAL and  
let the engine run for three minutes, then  
turn it off.  
All-wheel-drive vehicles with the five-speed  
automatic transmission can be dinghy towed from  
the front. You can also tow these vehicles by  
placing them on a platform trailer with all  
four wheels off of the ground. These vehicles  
cannot be towed using a dolly.  
If your vehicle has the five-speed automatic  
transmission, shift your transmission from  
DRIVE (D) to NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine  
run for three minutes. Then turn it off.  
Due to transmission fluid drain back, the  
transmission lubrication procedure in Step 4 is  
required every seven hours after the initial  
procedure has been completed, regardless of  
the vehicle being towed or parked. Once the  
procedure is performed, the transmission  
is adequately lubricated and can be  
recreational vehicle towed for seven hours  
prior to repeating the lubrication procedure.  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
As an example, if you initially perform the  
lubrication procedure and tow your vehicle for  
three hours, then park for four hours, the  
lubrication procedure will need to be performed  
again, prior to dinghy towing the vehicle.  
Notice: If your vehicle has a four-speed  
automatic transmission, it can be dinghy towed  
from the front for unlimited miles at 65 mph  
(105 km/h). If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)  
while towing your vehicle, it could be damaged.  
The repairs would not be covered by your  
warranty. Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h)  
while towing your vehicle.  
Notice: Towing your vehicle after shifting the  
automatic transaxle (four-speed or five-speed)  
from anything other than DRIVE (D) to  
NEUTRAL (N) can cause internal damage to  
the automatic transaxle. Always shift the  
automatic transaxle (four-speed or five-speed)  
from DRIVE (D) to NEUTRAL (N) as the last  
shift before towing.  
Notice: If your vehicle has a five-speed  
automatic transmission and it is towed for  
more than seven hours without performing  
lubrication process or at speeds greater than  
65 mph (105 km/h), you could damage the  
automatic transmission. The repairs would  
not be covered by your warranty. Do not tow  
your vehicle for extended periods of time or at  
speeds greater than 65 mph (105 km/h).  
5. Locate and remove the large IGN fuse from  
the underhood fuse block. See Underhood  
Fuse Block on page 411.  
Notice: If you tow your vehicle without  
performing each of the steps listed under  
“Dinghy Towing,” you could damage the  
automatic transmission. Be sure to follow all  
steps of the dinghy towing procedure prior  
to and after towing your vehicle.  
After seven hours, repeat Step 4 above for the  
five-speed automatic transmission.  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Once you have reached your destination, do the  
following:  
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)  
All-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with  
two wheels on the ground. To properly tow  
these vehicles, they should be placed on a  
platform trailer with all four wheels off of the  
ground or dinghy towed from the front.  
1. Set the parking brake.  
2. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for a  
manual transmission. Shift the transmission to  
PARK (P) for an automatic transmission.  
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK and remove the  
key from the ignition.  
Dolly Towing  
(Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)  
4. Reinstall the large IGN fuse.  
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can  
damage the transmission. Be sure that the  
transaxle fluid is at the proper level before  
towing with all four wheels on the ground.  
Notice: Don’t tow a vehicle with the front drive  
wheels on the ground if one of the front tires  
is a compact spare tire. Towing with two  
different tire sizes on the front of the vehicle  
can cause severe damage to the transmission.  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To tow your front-wheel-drive vehicle from the front  
with two wheels on the ground, do the following:  
Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear  
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.  
2. If you have a five-speed automatic  
transmission or four-speed automatic  
transmission, move the shift lever to  
PARK (P). If you have a manual transmission,  
move the shift lever to SECOND (2).  
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.  
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead  
position with a clamping device designed for  
towing.  
5. Release the parking brake.  
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear  
could damage it. Also, repairs would not  
be covered by the warranty. Never have your  
vehicle towed from the rear.  
Do not tow your vehicle from the rear.  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with  
the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify  
the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you should  
read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”  
that appears later in this section. Trailering  
is different than just driving your vehicle  
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,  
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.  
Successful, safe trailering takes correct  
Towing a Trailer  
{CAUTION:  
If you do not use the correct equipment  
and drive properly, you can lose control  
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the  
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not  
work well — or even at all. You and your  
passengers could be seriously injured.  
You may also damage your vehicle; the  
resulting repairs would not be covered by  
your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you  
have followed all the steps in this section.  
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and  
information about towing a trailer with  
your vehicle.  
equipment, and it has to be used properly.  
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many  
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety  
rules. Many of these are important for your safety  
and that of your passengers. So please read  
this section carefully before you pull a trailer.  
Load-pulling components such as the engine,  
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires  
are forced to work harder against the drag of  
the added weight. The engine is required  
to operate at relatively higher speeds and under  
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,  
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,  
increasing the pulling requirements.  
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can  
damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs  
not covered by your warranty. To pull a trailer  
correctly, follow the advice in this part and see  
your dealer/retailer for important information  
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you have an automatic transmission, you can  
use INTERMEDIATE (I) or as you need to, a  
lower gear which will minimize heat buildup and  
extend the life of your transmission.  
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer  
If you do, here are some important points:  
There are many different laws, including speed  
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.  
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where  
you live but also where you’ll be driving.  
A good source for this information can be  
state or provincial police.  
If you have a manual transmission, you should  
not use FIFTH (5) gear. Drive in FOURTH (4)  
gear or as you need to a lower gear.  
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a  
trailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximum  
posted speed for trailers, or no more than  
55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on your  
vehicle’s parts.  
Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”  
later in this section.  
Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first  
500 miles (805 km) your new vehicle is driven.  
Your engine, axle or other parts could be  
damaged. The repairs would not be covered  
by your warranty.  
Don’t tow a trailer when the outside  
temperature is above 100°F (38°C).  
Three important considerations have to do  
with weight:  
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that  
you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph  
(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.  
This helps your engine and other parts of  
your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.  
the weight of the trailer  
the weight of the trailer tongue  
and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Weight of the Trailer  
Weight of the Trailer Tongue  
How heavy can a trailer safely be?  
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important  
weight to measure because it affects the total  
or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle  
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the  
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and  
the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you  
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers  
or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue  
weight your vehicle can carry, which will also  
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.  
And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue  
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be  
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your  
Vehicle on page 279 for more information about  
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.  
It should never weigh more than 1,500 lbs  
(680 kg). But even that can be too heavy.  
It depends on how you plan to use your rig.  
For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside  
temperature and how much your vehicle is used  
to pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend  
on any special equipment that you have on your  
vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the  
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer  
Tongue” later in this section for more information.  
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming  
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all  
the required trailering equipment. The weight  
of additional optional equipment, passengers and  
cargo must be subtracted from the maximum  
trailer weight.  
You can ask your retailer for trailering information  
or advice.  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability  
to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot  
cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR  
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR  
(Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect  
of additional weight may reduce your trailering  
capacity more than the total of the additional  
weight.  
Consider the following example:  
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs  
(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front  
axle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle.  
It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg),  
a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a  
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)  
of 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).  
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer  
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the  
total loaded trailer weight (B). If you’re using a  
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)  
should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer  
weight (B).  
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer  
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the  
weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able  
to get them right simply by moving some items  
around in the trailer.  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The trailer rating should be:  
You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axle  
weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle weight.  
Your vehicle now weighs:  
You can expect tongue weight to be at least  
10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and  
because the weight is applied well behind the  
rear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater  
than just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times  
as much. The weight at the rear axle could  
be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).  
Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs  
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the  
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to,  
but within the limit for RGAWR as well. The  
vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).  
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you  
may think that you should subtract 700 additional  
pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity  
to stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer  
would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may  
go further and think you must limit tongue weight  
to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceeding  
GVWR. But, you must still consider the effect  
on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now  
weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only  
put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle without  
exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is  
about 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the  
900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able  
to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.  
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with  
some of the latest options and you have a front seat  
passenger and two rear seat passengers with  
some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent  
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect  
that the largest trailer your vehicle can properly  
handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).  
Hitches  
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.  
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough  
roads are a few reasons why you will need the  
right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:  
It is important that you make sure your vehicle  
does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,  
GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating  
or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure you  
are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh  
your vehicle and trailer.  
The rear bumper on your vehicle is not  
intended for hitches. Do not attach rental  
hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.  
Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not  
attach to the bumper.  
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires  
Will you have to make any holes in the body  
of your vehicle when you install a trailer  
hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes  
later when you remove the hitch. If you don’t  
seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)  
from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.  
See Engine Exhaust on page 123. Dirt and  
water can, too.  
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the  
upper limit for cold tires. You will find these  
numbers on the Tire and Loading Information  
label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.  
Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for  
your vehicle or the Gross Axle Weight Rating  
(GAWR), including the weight of the trailer tongue.  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Chains  
Driving with a Trailer  
You should always attach chains between  
your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety  
chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the  
tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes  
separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety  
chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer  
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the  
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching  
safety chains and do not attach them to the  
bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you  
can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety  
chains to drag on the ground.  
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of  
experience. Before setting out for the open road,  
you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint  
yourself with the feel of handling and braking with  
the added weight of the trailer. And always  
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is  
now a good deal longer and not nearly as  
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.  
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and  
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector,  
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer  
has electric brakes, start your vehicle and  
trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake  
controller by hand to be sure the brakes are  
working. This lets you check your electrical  
connection at the same time.  
Trailer Brakes  
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, don’t try to  
tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system.  
If you do, both brake systems won’t work well,  
or at all.  
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure  
that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any  
trailer brakes are still working.  
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the  
trailer brakes, so you’ll be able to install, adjust  
and maintain them properly.  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Following Distance  
Making Turns  
Notice: Making very sharp turns while  
trailering could cause the trailer to come in  
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be  
damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns  
while trailering.  
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead  
as you would when driving your vehicle without  
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations  
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.  
Passing  
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider  
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer  
won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,  
trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden  
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.  
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when  
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a  
good deal longer when towing a trailer, you’ll need  
to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle  
before you can return to your lane.  
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer  
Backing Up  
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a  
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.  
See your retailer if you need information.  
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash  
whenever you signal a turn or lane change.  
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also  
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to  
turn, change lanes or stop.  
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with  
one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just  
move that hand to the left. To move the trailer  
to the right, move your hand to the right. Always  
back up slowly and, if possible, have someone  
guide you.  
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your  
instrument panel will flash for turns even if  
the bulbs on the trailer are burned out.  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing  
your signal when they are not. It’s important to  
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are  
still working.  
Parking on Hills  
{CAUTION:  
Driving on Grades  
You really should not park your vehicle,  
with a trailer attached, on a hill.  
If something goes wrong, your rig could  
start to move. People can be injured, and  
both your vehicle and the trailer can be  
damaged.  
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous  
grades exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended,  
higher than normal engine and transmission  
temperatures may result and damage your  
vehicle. Frequent stops are very important to  
allow the engine and transmission to cool.  
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you  
start down a long or steep downgrade. If you  
don’t shift down, you might have to use your  
brakes so much that they would get hot and no  
longer work well.  
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,  
here’s how to do it:  
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into  
PARK (P) for an automatic transmission, or  
into gear for a manual transmission.  
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce  
your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce  
the possibility of the engine and the transmission  
overheating. If your engine does overheat,  
see Engine Overheating on page 334.  
When parking uphill, turn your wheels away  
from the curb. When parking downhill,  
turn your wheels into the curb.  
2. Have someone place chocks behind the  
trailer wheels.  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. When the chocks are in place, release the  
regular brakes until the chocks absorb  
the load.  
Maintenance When Trailer Towing  
Your vehicle will need service more often when  
you’re pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance  
on page 420 for more information. Things that  
are especially important in trailer operation are  
automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine  
oil, axle lubricant, drive belt, cooling system and  
brake system. Each of these is covered in this  
manual, and the Index will help you find them  
quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to  
review this information before you start your trip.  
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your  
parking brake and shift into PARK (P) for an  
automatic transmission or REVERSE (R) for  
a manual transmission.  
5. Release the regular brakes.  
When You Are Ready to Leave After  
Parking on a Hill  
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and  
bolts are tight.  
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal  
down while you:  
start your engine,  
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing  
shift into a gear, and  
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat  
during severe operating conditions. See Engine  
Overheating on page 334.  
release the parking brake.  
2. Let up on the brake pedal.  
Changing a Tire When Trailer Towing  
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the  
chocks.  
If you get a flat tire while towing a trailer, be  
sure to secure the trailer and disconnect it from  
the vehicle before changing the tire.  
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store  
the chocks.  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The wires do not have a connector and should be  
wired to the trailer by a qualified electrical  
technician. The technician can use the following  
information when connecting a trailer wiring  
harness to your vehicle.  
Trailer Wiring  
Additional wire length has been provided for  
connecting trailer wiring to your vehicle. A loop of  
five wires is stored below the jack, which is located  
on the driver’s side of the cargo area. The wires are  
fused in both the underhood and instrument fuse  
Yellow: Left Turn Signal  
Brown: Parking Lamps  
Light Blue: Stop Lamps  
Black: Ground Wire  
page 410 and Underhood Fuse Block on page 411.  
Dark Green: Right Turn Signal  
When connecting a trailer harness, be sure you  
leave it loose enough so the wiring does not bend  
or break, but not so loose that it drags on the  
ground. Store harness below jack in the cargo area  
when it is not in use. Wrap the harness together  
and tie it neatly so it will not be damaged.  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Section 5  
Service and Appearance Care  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessories and Modifications  
Service  
When you add non-Saturn accessories to your  
vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance  
and safety, including such things as, airbags,  
braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions  
systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic  
systems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,  
and stability control. Some of these accessories  
may even cause malfunction or damage not  
covered by warranty.  
Your Saturn retailer knows your vehicle best and  
wants you to be happy with it. We hope you  
will go to your retailer for all your service needs.  
You will get genuine Saturn parts and  
Saturn-trained and supported service people.  
We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicle  
all Saturn.  
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.  
Saturn accessories are designed to complement  
and function with other systems on your vehicle.  
Your Saturn retailer can accessorize your vehicle  
using genuine Saturn accessories. When you go to  
your Saturn retailer and ask for Saturn accessories,  
you will know that Saturn-trained and supported  
service technicians will perform the work using  
genuine Saturn accessories.  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
California Proposition 65 Warning  
Doing Your Own Service Work  
Most motor vehicles, including this one,  
contain and/or emit chemicals known to  
the State of California to cause cancer  
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems  
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids,  
and some component wear by-products  
contain and/or emit these chemicals.  
{CAUTION:  
You can be injured and your vehicle could  
be damaged if you try to do service work  
on a vehicle without knowing enough  
about it.  
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,  
experience, the proper replacement  
parts, and tools before you attempt any  
vehicle maintenance task.  
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,  
and other fasteners. English and metric  
fasteners can be easily confused. If you  
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later  
break or fall off. You could be hurt.  
If you want to do some of your own service work,  
you should use the proper service manual. It  
tells you much more about how to service your  
vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper  
service manual, see Service Publications  
Ordering Information on page 453.  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before  
attempting to do your own service work, see  
page 88.  
Gasoline Octane  
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted  
octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating  
is less than 87, you might notice an audible  
knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred  
to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline  
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.  
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or  
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine  
needs service.  
You should keep a record with all parts receipts  
and list the mileage and the date of any service  
work you perform. See Maintenance Record  
on page 436.  
Adding Equipment to the Outside of  
Your Vehicle  
Gasoline Specifications  
Things you might add to the outside of your  
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may  
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer  
performance. Check with your retailer before  
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.  
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM  
specification D 4814 in the United States or  
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may  
contain an octane-enhancing additive called  
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl  
(MMT). Saturn recommends against the use  
of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on  
page 307 for additional information.  
Fuel  
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part  
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help  
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum  
vehicle performance, Saturn recommends the use  
of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent  
Gasoline.  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
California Fuel  
Additives  
If your vehicle is certified to meet California  
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on  
fuels that meet California specifications. See the  
underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not  
available in states adopting California emissions  
standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on  
fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission  
control system performance may be affected. The  
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your  
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction  
Indicator Lamp on page 175. If this occurs, return to  
your authorized Saturn retailer for diagnosis. If it is  
determined that the condition is caused by the type  
of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your  
warranty.  
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the  
United States are now required to contain additives  
that will help prevent engine and fuel system  
deposits from forming, allowing your emission  
control system to work properly. In most cases,  
you should not have to add anything to your  
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the  
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.  
Environmental Protection Agency regulations.  
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,  
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to  
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is  
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,  
your retailer has additives that will help correct  
and prevent most deposit-related problems.  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers  
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may  
be available in your area. We recommend that  
you use these gasolines if they comply with  
the specifications described earlier. However,  
E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing more  
than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles  
that were not designed for those fuels.  
We recommend against the use of such gasolines.  
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of  
spark plugs and the performance of the emission  
control system may be affected. The malfunction  
indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to  
your retailer for service.  
Fuels in Foreign Countries  
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for  
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use  
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal  
parts in the fuel system and also damage  
plastic and rubber parts. That damage would  
not be covered under your warranty.  
If you plan on driving in another country outside  
the United States or Canada, the proper fuel might  
be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or  
any other fuel not recommended in the previous  
text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of  
improper fuel would not be covered by your  
warranty.  
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for  
low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing  
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese  
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you  
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.  
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or  
contact a major oil company that does business  
in the country where you will be driving.  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Filling the Tank  
{CAUTION:  
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire  
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid  
injuries to you and others, read and follow  
all the instructions on the pump island.  
Turn off your engine when you are  
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near  
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not use  
cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and  
smoking materials away from fuel. Do not  
leave the fuel pump unattended when  
refueling your vehicle. This is against the  
law in some places. Do not re-enter the  
vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children  
away from the fuel pump; never let  
children pump fuel.  
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged  
fuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly  
counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if  
the cap is released too soon, it will spring back  
to the right.  
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise  
until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.  
The diagnostic system can determine if the  
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.  
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the  
on page 175.  
{CAUTION:  
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the  
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and  
then something ignites it, you could be  
badly burned. This spray can happen if  
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely  
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly  
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then  
unscrew the cap all the way.  
{CAUTION:  
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do  
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow  
of fuel by shutting off the pump or by  
notifying the station attendant. Leave the  
area immediately.  
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to  
get the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can  
get one for you. If you get the wrong type,  
it may not fit properly. This may cause  
your malfunction indicator lamp to light and  
may damage your fuel tank and emissions  
on page 175.  
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill  
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have  
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.  
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon  
as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on  
page 402.  
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Filling a Portable Fuel Container  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with  
the inside of the fill opening before  
operating the nozzle. Contact should  
be maintained until the filling is  
complete.  
Do not smoke while pumping  
gasoline.  
{CAUTION:  
Never fill a portable fuel container while it  
is in your vehicle. Static electricity  
discharge from the container can ignite  
the gasoline vapor. You can be badly  
burned and your vehicle damaged if this  
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and  
others:  
Do not use a cellular phone while  
pumping gasoline.  
Dispense gasoline only into approved  
containers.  
Do not fill a container while it is inside  
a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup  
bed, or on any surface other than the  
ground.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking Things Under  
the Hood  
{CAUTION:  
Things that burn can get on hot engine  
parts and start a fire. These include  
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,  
windshield washer and other fluids, and  
plastic or rubber. You or others could be  
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill  
things that will burn onto a hot engine.  
{CAUTION:  
An electric fan under the hood can start up  
and injure you even when the engine is not  
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools  
away from any underhood electric fan.  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hood Release  
To open the hood, do the following:  
1. Pull the handle with  
this symbol on it.  
It is located  
under the instrument  
panel on the  
driver’s side of  
the vehicle.  
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up  
on the secondary hood release lever.  
3. Lift the hood.  
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps  
are on properly. Then pull the hood down and  
close it firmly.  
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Compartment Overview  
When you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 engine, you will see the following:  
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air  
F. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse  
Cleaner/Filter on page 324.  
Block on page 411.  
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”  
G. Battery. See Battery on page 347.  
under Engine Oil on page 318.  
H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump  
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine  
Starting on page 348.  
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 318.  
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See “Checking  
D. Remote Negative () Terminal. See Jump  
Coolant” under Engine Coolant on page 331.  
Starting on page 348.  
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See  
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield  
Washer Fluid on page 341.  
E. Brake/Clutch Cylinder Fluid. See Brakes on  
page 343 and Hydraulic Clutch on page 331.  
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine, you will see the following:  
316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air  
F. Battery. See Battery on page 347.  
Cleaner/Filter on page 324.  
G. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse  
B. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See  
“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on  
page 318.  
Block on page 411.  
H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal (Out of View).  
See Jump Starting on page 348.  
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of View). See “When  
to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on  
page 318.  
I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See “Checking  
Coolant” under Engine Coolant on page 331.  
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See  
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield  
Washer Fluid on page 341.  
D. Remote Negative () Terminal. See Jump  
Starting on page 348.  
E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on  
page 343.  
317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When to Add Engine Oil  
Engine Oil  
Checking Engine Oil  
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time  
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,  
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be  
on level ground.  
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop for  
the 2.2L L4 engine and an orange loop for the  
3.5L V6 engine. See Engine Compartment  
Overview on page 314 for the location of the  
engine oil dipstick.  
2.2L L4 Engine  
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several  
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you  
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not  
show the actual level.  
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper  
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the  
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,  
and check the level.  
3.5L V6 Engine  
318  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark for the  
2.2L L4 engine or below the lower mark (B) for  
the 3.5L V6 engine, you need to add at least  
one quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right  
kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.  
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities  
and Specifications on page 414.  
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine  
has so much oil that the oil level gets above  
the upper mark that shows the proper  
2.2L L4 Engine  
3.5L V6 Engine  
operating range, the engine could be damaged.  
for the location of the engine oil fill cap.  
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level  
somewhere in the proper operating range.  
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you  
are through.  
319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Look for three things:  
GM6094M  
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use  
For Vehicles with the 2.2L L4 Engine Only  
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM  
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only  
an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.  
SAE 5W-30  
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is  
best for your vehicle.  
These numbers on an oil container show its  
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other  
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.  
320  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as  
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing  
the American Petroleum Institute Certified  
For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure  
to use the recommended oil can result in  
engine damage not covered by your warranty.  
Oils meeting these  
requirements should  
have the starburst  
symbol on the  
container. This  
symbol indicates that  
the oil has been  
certified by the  
American Petroleum  
Institute (API).  
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where  
the temperature falls below 20°F (29°C), it is  
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30  
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide  
easier cold starting and better protection for  
the engine at extremely low temperatures.  
Look for this information on the oil container, and  
use only those oils that are identified as meeting  
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst  
symbol on the front of the oil container.  
321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Oils meeting these  
requirements should  
also have the starburst  
symbol on the  
For Vehicles with the 3.5L V6 Engine Only  
container. This symbol  
indicates that the oil  
has been certified by the  
American Petroleum  
Institute (API).  
Look for this information on the oil container,  
and use only those oils that have the starburst  
symbol on the front of the oil container.  
Notice: Use only engine oil with the American  
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline  
Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the  
recommended oil can result in engine damage  
not covered by your warranty.  
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-20 is  
best for your vehicle.  
These numbers on an oil container show its  
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity  
oils such as SAE 20W-50.  
Engine Oil Additives  
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended  
oil with the starburst symbol are all you need  
for good performance and engine protection.  
322  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must  
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since  
your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life  
system whenever the oil is changed.  
Engine Oil Life System  
When to Change Engine Oil  
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you  
know when to change the engine oil and filter.  
This is based on engine revolutions and engine  
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving  
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change  
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil  
life system to work properly, you must reset the  
system every time the oil is changed.  
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life  
System  
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to  
change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle  
use. Whenever the oil is changed, reset the  
system so it can calculate when the next oil  
change is required. If a situation occurs where you  
change the oil prior to a change engine oil light  
being turned on, reset the system.  
When the system has calculated that oil life has  
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is  
necessary. A change engine oil light will come on.  
See Change Engine Oil Light on page 179. Change  
the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles  
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving  
under the best conditions, the oil life system might  
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over  
a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be  
changed at least once a year and at this time the  
system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has  
trained service people who will perform this work  
using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also  
important to check the oil regularly and keep it at  
the proper level.  
After changing the engine oil, reset the system:  
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the  
engine off.  
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal  
three times within five seconds.  
If the change engine oil light is flashing, the  
system is reset. The light will flash for up  
to 30 seconds or until the ignition is turned off.  
If the light comes on again and stays on for  
30 seconds at the next ignition cycle, it did not  
reset. You will need to reset the system again.  
323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
What to Do with Used Oil  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can  
be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause  
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very  
long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and  
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly  
dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine  
oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use  
and disposal of oil products.  
for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.  
When to Inspect the Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter  
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II  
intervals and replace it at the first oil change  
after each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See  
Scheduled Maintenance on page 420 for more  
information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty  
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine  
oil change.  
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you  
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil  
from the filter before disposal. Never dispose  
of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the  
ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of  
water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place  
that collects used oil. If you have a problem  
properly disposing of used oil, ask your  
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local  
recycling center for help.  
How to Inspect the Engine Air  
Cleaner/Filter  
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter  
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to  
release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains  
caked with dirt, a new filter is required.  
324  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,  
do the following:  
2. Disconnect the hose.  
1. Unscrew the clamp on the air duct hose.  
325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Release the clamps on the side of the air  
cleaner assembly.  
5. Remove the air cleaner cover assembly and  
air filter element.  
4. Turn the cover upward to disengage the  
cover hinges.  
6. Inspect or replace the air filter element.  
If the air filter element is dirty, you should  
replace it. If it is only dusty, it may be cleaned  
by blowing compressed air through it from  
the clean side.  
Make sure you are away from the engine  
compartment when cleaning the air filter with  
compressed air.  
326  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and  
inspect the air cleaner and air outlet duct  
for cracks, cuts and deterioration. The  
Automatic Transaxle Fluid  
(2.2L L4 Engine)  
air outlet duct must be replaced if damaged.  
When to Check and Change Automatic  
Transaxle Fluid  
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall  
the engine air cleaner/filter cover and air  
duct hose.  
A good time to check your automatic transaxle  
fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.  
Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional  
Required Services on page 423, and be sure to  
use the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 432.  
{CAUTION:  
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/  
filter off can cause you or others to be  
burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the  
air; it helps to stop flames if the engine  
backfires. If it is not there and the engine  
backfires, you could be burned. Do not  
drive with it off, and be careful working on  
the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.  
How to Check Automatic  
Transaxle Fluid  
If your vehicle is equipped with the 2.2L L4  
engine, you will have to have this procedure done  
at your retailer’s service department.  
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic  
transaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, and  
the damages may not be covered by your  
warranty. Always use the automatic transaxle  
fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 432.  
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire  
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt  
can easily get into your engine, which will  
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter  
in place when you are driving.  
327  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage  
the transaxle. Too much can mean that some of  
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine  
or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too  
little fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.  
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check  
the transaxle fluid.  
Automatic Transaxle Fluid  
(3.5L V6 Engine)  
When to Check and Change Automatic  
Transaxle Fluid  
A good time to check your automatic transaxle  
fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.  
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the  
transaxle fluid level if you have been driving:  
Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional  
Required Services on page 423, and be sure to  
use the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 432.  
When outside temperatures are  
above 90°F (32°C).  
At high speed for quite a while.  
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.  
While pulling a trailer.  
How to Check Automatic  
Transaxle Fluid  
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at  
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to  
200°F (82°C to 93°C).  
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you  
may choose to have this done at your retailer’s  
service department.  
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about  
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are  
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),  
you may have to drive longer.  
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the  
instructions here, or you could get a false reading  
on the dipstick.  
328  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Then, turn off the engine and follow these steps:  
Checking the Fluid Level  
The transaxle fluid dipstick handle is the black loop  
near the rear of the engine compartment, toward  
the center.  
Prepare your vehicle as follows:  
1. Park your vehicle on a level place.  
2. Warm the engine to normal operating  
temperature until the electric radiator fan turns  
on at least once.  
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean  
rag or paper towel.  
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds  
and then pull it back out again.  
3. With the parking brake applied, place the shift  
lever in PARK (P).  
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the  
lower level. The fluid level must be between  
the upper mark and the lower mark.  
4. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the  
shift lever through each gear range, pausing  
for about three seconds in each range.  
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,  
push the dipstick back in all the way.  
Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).  
329  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid  
Manual Transaxle Fluid  
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine  
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See  
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.  
A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid  
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your  
retailer’s service department and have it repaired  
as soon as possible. See Recommended Fluids  
and Lubricants on page 432 for the proper fluid  
to use.  
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of  
the proper fluid to bring the level into the  
cross-hatched area on the dipstick.  
1. Pull out the dipstick.  
Notice: Use of manual transaxle fluid other  
than that listed in the Maintenance Schedule  
may damage your vehicle, and the damages  
may not be covered by your warranty. Always  
use the correct manual transaxle fluid in  
your vehicle. See Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 432 for the correct manual  
transaxle fluid.  
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at  
the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.  
It does not take much fluid, generally less  
than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.  
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic  
transaxle fluid may damage your vehicle,  
and the damages may not be covered by your  
warranty. Always use the automatic transaxle  
fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 432.  
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as  
described under “How to Check Automatic  
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.  
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push  
the dipstick back in all the way.  
330  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and  
DEX-COOL® coolant will:  
Hydraulic Clutch  
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is  
self-adjusting. The hydraulic clutch system does  
not have its own reservoir. The system receives  
fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir. It is  
filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. See Brakes on  
page 343 for more information.  
Give freezing protection down to  
34°F (37°C).  
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).  
Protect against rust and corrosion.  
Help keep the proper engine temperature.  
Let the warning lights and gages work as  
they should.  
Engine Coolant  
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with  
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is  
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years  
or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever  
occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL®  
extended life coolant.  
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®  
may cause premature engine, heater core, or  
radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine  
coolant may require changing sooner, at  
the first maintenance service after each  
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,  
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would  
not be covered by your warranty. Always  
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in  
your vehicle.  
The following explains your cooling system and  
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have  
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine  
Overheating on page 334.  
331  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: If you use an improper coolant  
mixture, your engine could overheat and be  
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be  
covered by your warranty. Too much water  
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,  
radiator, heater core, and other parts.  
What to Use  
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water  
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will  
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant  
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.  
If you have to add coolant more than four times a  
year, have your retailer check your cooling system.  
{CAUTION:  
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or  
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system,  
you could damage your vehicle. Use only the  
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed  
in this manual for the cooling system.  
on page 432 for more information.  
Adding only plain water to your cooling  
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or  
some other liquid such as alcohol, can  
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.  
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is  
set for the proper coolant mixture. With  
plain water or the wrong mixture, your  
engine could get too hot but you would  
not get the overheat warning. Your engine  
could catch fire and you or others could  
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,  
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.  
332  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking Coolant  
{CAUTION:  
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when  
the engine and radiator are hot can allow  
steam and scalding liquids to blow out  
and burn you badly. Never turn the surge  
tank pressure cap — even a little — when  
the engine and radiator are hot.  
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When  
your engine is cold, the coolant level should  
be at the COLD FILL line. When your engine is  
warm, the level should be at the COLD FILL line or  
a little higher.  
The surge tank is located on the driver’s  
side of the engine compartment. See Engine  
Compartment Overview on page 314 for more  
information on location.  
333  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Coolant  
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap  
If you need more coolant, add the proper  
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly  
installed, coolant loss and possible engine  
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly  
and tightly secured.  
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,  
but only when the engine is cool. See Engine  
Overheating on page 334 for instructions on “How  
to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”  
If you need to replace your coolant surge tank  
pressure cap, see your retailer.  
{CAUTION:  
Engine Overheating  
You can be burned if you spill coolant  
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains  
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the  
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill  
coolant on a hot engine.  
You will find a coolant temperature gage and a  
coolant temperature warning light on your vehicle’s  
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant  
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is  
hand-tight and fully seated.  
334  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine  
If No Steam Is Coming From  
Your Engine  
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see  
or hear no steam, the problem may not be too  
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too  
hot when you:  
{CAUTION:  
Steam from an overheated engine can  
burn you badly, even if you just open the  
hood. Stay away from the engine if you  
see or hear steam coming from it. Just  
turn it off and get everyone away from the  
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until  
there is no sign of steam or coolant  
before you open the hood.  
Climb a long hill on a hot day.  
Stop after high-speed driving.  
Idle for long periods in traffic.  
Tow a trailer.  
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of  
steam, try this for a minute or so:  
If you keep driving when your engine is  
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.  
You or others could be badly burned.  
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get  
out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.  
1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on,  
turn it off.  
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest  
fan speed and open the windows as  
necessary.  
3. Try to minimize engine load. If you are in a  
traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise,  
shift to the highest gear possible while driving.  
Notice: If your engine catches fire because  
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle  
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs  
would not be covered by your warranty.  
335  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you no longer have the overheat warning,  
you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for  
about ten minutes. If the warning does not come  
back on, you can drive normally.  
Cooling System  
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is  
what you will see:  
If the warning continues and you have not  
stopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle  
right away.  
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the  
engine for three minutes while you are parked.  
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine  
and get everyone out of the vehicle until it  
cools down.  
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get  
service help right away.  
2.2L L4 Engine shown, 3.5L V6 Engine similar  
A. Electric Engine Fan  
B. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap  
336  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION: (Continued)  
{CAUTION:  
Do not run the engine if there is a leak.  
If you run the engine, it could lose all  
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,  
and you could be burned. Get any leak  
fixed before you drive the vehicle.  
An electric engine cooling fan under the  
hood can start up even when the engine  
is not running and can injure you. Keep  
hands, clothing, and tools away from any  
underhood electric fan.  
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,  
check to see if the electric engine cooling fan  
is running. If the engine is overheating, the  
fan should be running. If it is not, your vehicle  
needs service. Turn off the engine.  
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is  
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.  
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.  
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.  
If it is not, you may have a leak at the radiator  
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump,  
or somewhere else in the cooling system.  
Notice: Engine damage from running your  
engine without coolant is not covered by your  
warranty.  
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®  
may cause premature engine, heater core, or  
radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine  
coolant could require changing sooner, at  
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,  
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not  
be covered by your warranty. Always use  
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your  
vehicle.  
{CAUTION:  
Heater and radiator hoses, and other  
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not  
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
337  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant  
Surge Tank  
{CAUTION:  
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill  
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure  
could cause your engine to overheat and  
be severely damaged.  
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot  
cooling system can blow out and burn  
you badly. They are under pressure, and if  
you turn the coolant surge tank pressure  
cap — even a little — they can come out at  
high speed. Never turn the cap when the  
cooling system, including the coolant  
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for  
the cooling system and coolant surge  
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have  
to turn the pressure cap.  
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see  
if coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant  
is visible but the coolant level is not at the COLD  
FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable  
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant  
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,  
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is  
cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant on  
page 331 for more information.  
338  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and  
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and  
other parts. Use the recommended coolant  
and the proper coolant mixture.  
{CAUTION:  
Adding only plain water to your cooling  
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or  
some other liquid such as alcohol, can  
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.  
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is  
set for the proper coolant mixture. With  
plain water or the wrong mixture, your  
engine could get too hot but you would  
not get the overheat warning. Your engine  
could catch fire and you or others could  
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,  
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.  
{CAUTION:  
You can be burned if you spill coolant on  
hot engine parts. Coolant contains  
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the  
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill  
coolant on a hot engine.  
339  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank  
pressure cap when the cooling system,  
including the coolant surge tank pressure cap  
and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.  
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise  
about one-quarter of a turn.  
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper  
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the COLD  
FILL line.  
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.  
This will allow any pressure still left to be  
vented out the discharge hose.  
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,  
and remove it.  
340  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check the level in the surge tank when the cooling  
system has cooled down. If the coolant is not  
at the proper level, repeat Steps 1 through 3 and  
reinstall the pressure cap. If the coolant still is  
not at the proper level when the system cools  
down again, see your retailer.  
Windshield Washer Fluid  
What to Use  
When you need windshield or rear window  
washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s  
instructions before use. If you will be operating  
your vehicle in an area where the temperature may  
fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient  
protection against freezing.  
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,  
start the engine and let it run until you can  
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch  
out for the engine cooling fan.  
By this time, the coolant level inside the  
coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level  
is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®  
coolant mixture to the coolant surge tank  
until the level reaches the COLD FILL line.  
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the  
pressure cap is hand-tight.  
341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice:  
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid  
When using concentrated washer fluid,  
follow the manufacturer’s instructions  
for adding water.  
Open the cap with the  
washer symbol on it.  
Add washer fluid until  
the tank is full. See  
Overview on page 314  
for reservoir location.  
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer  
fluid. Water can cause the solution to  
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank  
and other parts of the washer system.  
Also, water does not clean as well  
as washer fluid.  
Fill the washer fluid tank only  
three-quarters full when it is very cold.  
This allows for fluid expansion if freezing  
occurs, which could damage the tank if it is  
completely full.  
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in  
your windshield washer. It can damage  
the vehicle’s windshield washer system  
and paint.  
342  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.  
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add  
fluid when the linings are worn, then you will have  
too much fluid when you get new brake linings.  
You should add or remove brake fluid, as  
necessary, only when work is done on the brake  
hydraulic system.  
Brakes  
Brake Fluid  
The brake master  
cylinder reservoir is  
filled with DOT-3 brake  
fluid. See Engine  
on page 314 for the  
location of the reservoir.  
{CAUTION:  
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it  
can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if  
the engine is hot enough. You or others  
could be burned, and your vehicle could be  
damaged. Add brake fluid only when work  
is done on the brake hydraulic system.  
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid  
level in the reservoir might go down. The first  
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable  
level during normal brake lining wear. When  
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back  
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of  
the brake system. If it is, you should have the  
brake system fixed, since a leak means that  
sooner or later the brakes will not work well.  
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake  
warning light will come on. See Brake System  
Warning Light on page 170.  
343  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice:  
What to Add  
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage  
brake system parts. For example, just a  
few drops of mineral-based oil, such  
as engine oil, in the brake system can  
damage brake system parts so badly that  
they will have to be replaced. Do not  
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.  
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3  
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed  
container only. See Recommended Fluids  
and Lubricants on page 432.  
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the  
area around the cap before removing it. This  
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.  
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s  
painted surfaces, the paint finish can  
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake  
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it  
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle  
on page 402.  
{CAUTION:  
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake  
system, the brakes may not work well.  
This could cause a crash. Always use the  
proper brake fluid.  
344  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a  
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied  
or lightly applied. This does not mean something  
is wrong with the brakes.  
Brake Wear  
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum  
brakes.  
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that  
make a high-pitched warning sound when the  
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.  
The sound can come and go or be heard all  
the time your vehicle is moving, except when  
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.  
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help  
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,  
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten  
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque  
on page 414.  
The rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators,  
but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise,  
have the rear brake linings inspected immediately.  
Also, the rear brake drums should be removed  
and inspected each time the tires are removed for  
rotation or changing. When you have the front  
brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes  
inspected, too.  
{CAUTION:  
The brake wear warning sound means that  
soon the brakes will not work well. That  
could lead to an accident. When you hear  
the brake wear warning sound, have your  
vehicle serviced.  
Brake linings should always be replaced as  
complete axle sets.  
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out  
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.  
345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brake Pedal Travel  
Replacing Brake System Parts  
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does  
not return to normal height or if there is a  
rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be  
a sign that brake service might be required.  
The braking system on a vehicle is complex.  
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work  
well together if the vehicle is to have really good  
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with  
top-quality brake parts. When you replace parts  
of the braking system — for example, when the  
brake linings wear down and you need new  
ones put in — be sure you get new approved  
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might  
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in  
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the  
balance between the front and rear brakes can  
change — for the worse. The braking performance  
you have come to expect can change in many other  
ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement  
brake parts.  
Brake Adjustment  
Every time you make a moderate brake stop,  
the brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make  
a moderate or heavier stop, then the brakes might  
not adjust correctly. If you drive in that way,  
then — very carefully — make a few moderate  
brake stops about every 1,000 miles (1 600 km),  
so the brakes will adjust properly.  
346  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle Storage  
Battery  
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for  
25 days or more, remove the black, negative ()  
cable from the battery. This will help keep the  
battery from running down.  
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.  
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has  
the replacement number shown on the original  
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®  
replacement battery. See Engine Compartment  
Overview on page 314 for battery location.  
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related  
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,  
chemicals known to the State of California  
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash  
hands after handling.  
{CAUTION:  
Batteries have acid that can burn you and  
gas that can explode. You can be badly  
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump  
Starting on page 348 for tips on working  
around a battery without getting hurt.  
347  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or  
pulling it will not work, and it could damage  
your vehicle.  
Jump Starting  
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may  
want to use another vehicle and some jumper  
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use  
the following steps to do it safely.  
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a  
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.  
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a  
12-volt system with a negative ground,  
both vehicles can be damaged. Only use  
vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative  
grounds to jump start your vehicle.  
{CAUTION:  
Batteries can hurt you. They can be  
dangerous because:  
They contain acid that can burn you.  
They contain gas that can explode or  
ignite.  
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper  
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are  
not touching each other. If they are, it could  
cause a ground connection you do not  
want. You would not be able to start your  
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage  
the electrical systems.  
They contain enough electricity to  
burn you.  
If you do not follow these steps exactly,  
some or all of these things can hurt you.  
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,  
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles  
involved in the jump start procedure. Put  
an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or  
a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before  
setting the parking brake.  
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in  
costly damage to your vehicle that would  
not be covered by your warranty.  
348  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: If you leave your radio or other  
accessories on during the jump starting  
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs  
would not be covered by your warranty.  
Always turn off your radio and other  
A. Remote Positive  
B. Remote Negative  
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.  
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.  
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into  
the cigarette lighter or the accessory power  
outlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are  
not needed. This will avoid sparks and help  
save both batteries. And it could save  
the radio!  
2.2L L4 Engine  
Vehicles equipped with the 2.2L L4 engine,  
the remote positive (+) terminal is located  
in the engine compartment on the driver’s side  
of the vehicle, on the underhood fuse block.  
page 314 for more information on location.  
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and  
locate the positive (+) and negative ()  
terminal locations on that vehicle.  
Open the hood on your vehicle and find the  
remote positive (+) and remote negative ()  
jump starting terminals.  
Access the remote positive (+) terminal  
by removing the fuse block cover.  
The remote negative () terminal is the lift  
hook, which is located towards the rear of the  
engine on the driver’s side.  
349  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A. Remote Negative  
B. Positive Terminal  
After unsnapping and opening the black cap  
on the positive (+) terminal on the top of  
the battery, clamp the jumper cable to  
the terminal.  
Place the negative (-) jumper cable clamp on  
the nut on the end of the engine.  
{CAUTION:  
3.5L V6 Engine  
An electric fan can start up even when the  
engine is not running and can injure you.  
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from  
any underhood electric fan.  
Vehicle equipped with the 3.5L V6 engine, the  
positive (+) terminal is located in the engine  
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle  
on the battery. The negative () terminal is  
located in the engine compartment on  
the driver’s side of the vehicle. See Engine  
Compartment Overview on page 314 for more  
information on location.  
350  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Using a match near a battery can cause  
battery gas to explode. People have been  
hurt doing this, and some have been  
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need  
more light.  
Fans or other moving engine parts can  
injure you badly. Keep your hands away  
from moving parts once the engine is  
running.  
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have  
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you  
could get a shock. The vehicles could  
be damaged too.  
Be sure the battery has enough water.  
You do not need to add water to the  
battery installed in your new vehicle. But  
if a battery has filler caps, be sure the  
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,  
add water to take care of that first. If you  
do not, explosive gas could be present.  
Before you connect the cables, here are some  
basic things you should know. Positive (+)  
will go to positive (+) or to a remote  
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.  
Negative () will go to a heavy, unpainted  
metal engine part or to a remote negative ()  
terminal if the vehicle has one.  
Battery fluid contains acid that can  
burn you. Do not get it on you. If you  
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your  
skin, flush the place with water and get  
medical help immediately.  
Do not connect positive (+) to negative ()  
or you will get a short that would damage the  
battery and maybe other parts too. And do  
not connect the negative () cable to the  
negative () terminal on the dead battery  
because this can cause sparks.  
351  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the  
positive (+) terminal on the vehicle with  
the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+)  
terminal if the vehicle has one.  
9. Connect the other end of the negative ()  
cable away from the dead battery, but not  
near engine parts that move. The electrical  
connection is just as good there, and the  
chance of sparks getting back to the battery is  
much less.  
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect  
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good  
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if  
the vehicle has one.  
Your vehicle has a remote negative ()  
terminal for this purpose.  
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery  
and run the engine for a while.  
8. Now connect the black negative () cable to  
the negative () terminal of the good battery.  
Use a remote negative () terminal if the  
vehicle has one.  
11. Press the unlock symbol on the remote  
keyless entry transmitter to disarm your  
security system, if equipped.  
Do not let the other end touch anything  
until the next step. The other end of the  
negative () cable does not go to the dead  
battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted  
metal engine part or to a remote negative ()  
terminal on the vehicle with the dead  
battery.  
12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead  
battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it  
probably needs service.  
352  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or  
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting  
may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs  
would not be covered by your warranty. Always  
connect and remove the jumper cables in the  
correct order, making sure that the cables do  
not touch each other or other metal.  
To disconnect the jumper cables from both  
vehicles, do the following:  
1. Disconnect the black negative () cable from  
the vehicle that had the dead battery.  
2. Disconnect the black negative () cable from  
the vehicle with the good battery.  
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the  
vehicle with the good battery.  
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the  
other vehicle.  
5. Return the underhood fuse block cover to its  
original position, if applicable.  
All-Wheel Drive  
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to  
perform the lubricant checks described in this  
section. There are two additional systems  
that need lubrication.  
Jumper Cable Removal  
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or  
Remote Negative () Terminal  
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and  
Remote Negative () Terminals  
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal  
353  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be  
on a level surface.  
Transfer Case (3.5L V6 Engine)  
When to Check and Change Lubricant  
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug  
hole, located on the transfer case, you’ll need to  
add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to  
raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.  
A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check  
and have it repaired, if needed.  
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine  
how often to check the lubricant and when to  
change it. See Scheduled Maintenance on  
page 420.  
How to Check Lubricant  
What to Use  
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine  
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 432.  
A. Fill Plug  
B. Drain Plug  
354  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The vehicle should be placed so it is  
Headlamp Aiming  
The visual optical headlamp aiming system has  
been preset at the factory and should need  
no further adjustment.  
perpendicular to the wall or other flat surface.  
The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or  
mud on it.  
The vehicle should be fully assembled and all  
other work stopped while headlamp aiming is  
being performed.  
However, if the vehicle is damaged in an accident,  
the aim of the headlamps may be affected and  
adjustment may be necessary.  
The vehicle should be normally loaded with a  
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs  
(75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.  
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at  
you, this may mean the vertical aim of your  
headlamps needs to be adjusted.  
Tires should be properly inflated.  
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your  
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need  
to be adjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim the  
headlamps as described.  
The spare tire is in its proper location in  
the vehicle.  
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s  
low-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlamps  
will be correctly aimed if the low-beam headlamps  
are aimed properly.  
The vehicle should be properly prepared  
as follows:  
The vehicle should be placed so the  
headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light  
colored wall.  
The vehicle must have all four tires on a level  
surface which is level all the way to the wall.  
355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To adjust the vertical aim:  
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on  
page 313 for more information.  
4. At the wall measure from the ground  
upward (A) to the recorded distance  
from Step 3 and mark it.  
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall  
the width of the vehicle at the height of the  
mark in Step 4.  
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve  
beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a  
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the  
low-beam headlamp.  
headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up  
which may cause damage to the headlamp.  
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the  
aim dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record  
the distance.  
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a  
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the  
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows  
only the beam of light from the headlamp  
being adjusted to be seen on the flat surface.  
356  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is  
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal  
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows  
the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the  
right (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.  
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,  
which are under the hood near each headlamp  
assembly.  
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite  
headlamp.  
The adjustment screw can be turned with a  
6 mm socket.  
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until  
the headlamp beam is aimed to the  
horizontal tape line. Turn it clockwise or  
counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle  
of the beam.  
357  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Headlamps  
Bulb Replacement  
For the type of bulb to use, see Replacement  
Bulbs on page 364.  
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this  
section, contact your retailer.  
Halogen Bulbs  
{CAUTION:  
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas  
inside and can burst if you drop or  
scratch the bulb. You or others could be  
injured. Be sure to read and follow the  
instructions on the bulb package.  
A. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp  
B. Low-beam Headlamp/Daytime Running  
Lamp (DRL)  
C. High-beam Headlamp  
358  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To replace one of the headlamp bulbs, use the  
following procedure. To replace the parking/turn  
signal lamp bulb, see Front Turn Signal and  
Parking Lamps on page 361.  
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on  
page 313 for more information.  
3. Remove the two screws retaining the  
headlamp assembly.  
2. Remove the two screws from the top of the  
front fascia and grille. They are inboard of  
the headlamp assembly.  
359  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Insert a flat blade tool through the opening in  
the top. Make sure the tool fits through the  
opening in the headlamp bracket lower arm.  
5. Push the locking tab toward the rear of the  
vehicle with the tool to lift the headlamp  
bracket lower arm.  
6. Pull back on the front fascia and then pull the  
headlamp assembly out from the vehicle. You  
may need someone to assist you with this step.  
7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the  
bulb assembly.  
8. Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to  
remove it from the housing.  
9. Replace the old bulb with a new one.  
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 8 to reinstall.  
360  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front Turn Signal and  
Parking Lamps  
To replace a front turn signal or parking lamp  
bulb, do the following:  
1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 under Headlamps  
on page 358 to access the front turn signal  
or parking lamp.  
2. Turn the bulb to be replaced counterclockwise  
to remove it from the headlamp assembly.  
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket assembly.  
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket  
assembly.  
5. Insert the bulb assembly into the headlamp  
assembly.  
6. Turn the bulb assembly clockwise until  
seated.  
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp  
assembly.  
361  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Center High-Mounted  
Stoplamp (CHMSL)  
To replace a CHMSL bulb, do the following:  
1. Remove the center high-mounted stoplamp  
(CHMSL) fasteners from the outside of the  
vehicle.  
2. Pull the CHMSL out of the liftgate.  
3. Disconnect the rear washer hose from the  
rear washer nozzle.  
5. Depress the tabs on the CHMSL lens to  
separate the CHMSL bulb from the  
CHMSL lens.  
4. Disconnect the electrical connector from  
the CHMSL.  
6. Pull the CHMSL bulb out of the assembly.  
7. Replace the old bulb with a new one.  
8. Align the tabs on the CHMSL lens with the  
CHMSL bulb assembly, and push to install.  
9. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall the  
CHMSL assembly.  
362  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps  
and Back-up Lamps  
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:  
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 103 for  
more information.  
2. Remove the two screws retaining the taillamp  
assembly.  
3. Slide the taillamp  
assembly rearward  
and away from  
the vehicle.  
5. Turn the bulb socket being replaced  
counterclockwise to disconnect it.  
6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.  
7. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.  
8. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 to reinstall the  
taillamp assembly.  
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and  
remove it from the taillamp assembly.  
363  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
License Plate Lamp  
Replacement Bulbs  
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:  
Exterior Lamp  
Back-up  
CHMSL  
Bulb Number  
3156  
1. Remove the two screws holding each of  
the license plate lamps to the fascia.  
W5W  
Front Turn Signal/Parking  
Headlamps  
3157K  
High-beam  
Low-beam/DRL  
9005 or HB3  
9006 or HB4  
Rear Turn Signal, Stoplamp and  
Taillamp  
3057  
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact  
your dealer/retailer.  
Windshield Wiper Blade  
Replacement  
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for  
wear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance  
on page 420 for more information.  
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward  
through the fascia opening.  
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and  
pull the bulb straight out of the socket.  
4. Install the new bulb.  
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the  
license plate lamp.  
Replacement blades come in different types and  
are removed in different ways. For proper type and  
Parts on page 434.  
364  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the  
hook and push the wiper arm (A) out of the  
blade (C).  
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly  
do the following:  
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.  
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the  
wiper arm until you hear the release lever  
click into place.  
To replace the rear wiper blade, follow the steps  
listed above.  
365  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires  
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever  
have questions about your tire warranty and where  
to obtain service, see your Saturn Warranty booklet  
for details. For additional information refer to the tire  
manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.  
Tire pressure should be checked when  
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See  
Overinflated tires are more likely to be  
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden  
impact — such as when you hit a  
pothole. Keep tires at the  
{CAUTION:  
recommended pressure.  
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.  
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if  
your vehicle’s tires have been  
Poorly maintained and improperly used  
tires are dangerous.  
Overloading your vehicle’s tires can  
cause overheating as a result of too  
much friction. You could have an  
air-out and a serious accident. See  
Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.  
Underinflated tires pose the same  
danger as overloaded tires. The  
resulting accident could cause serious  
injury. Check all tires frequently to  
maintain the recommended pressure.  
damaged, replace them.  
Low-Profile Performance Tire  
(Red Line)  
If your vehicle has P245/50R18 size tires, they are  
classified as low-profile performance tires. These  
tires are designed for very responsive driving on  
wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more  
road noise with low-profile performance tires and  
that they tend to wear faster.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
366  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,  
they are more susceptible to damage from road  
hazards or curb impact than standard profile  
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage  
can occur when coming into contact with  
road hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged  
objects, or when sliding into a curb. Your  
Saturn Warranty does not cover this type of  
damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation  
pressure and, when possible avoid contact  
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.  
Tire Sidewall Labeling  
Useful information about a tire is molded into its  
sidewall. The examples below show a typical  
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire  
sidewall.  
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example  
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of  
letters and numbers used to define a particular  
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,  
and service description. See the “Tire Size”  
illustration later in this section for more detail.  
367  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed  
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have  
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.  
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all  
federal safety guidelines.  
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and  
number of plies in the sidewall and under  
the tread.  
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire  
manufacturers are required to grade tires  
based on three performance factors: treadwear,  
traction, and temperature resistance. For more  
information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on  
page 380.  
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The  
Department of Transportation (DOT) code  
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the  
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards.  
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load  
Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the  
maximum pressure needed to support that load.  
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters  
and numbers following DOT (Department of  
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification  
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer  
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire  
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both  
sides of the tire, although only one side may have  
the date of manufacture.  
368  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and  
number of plies in the sidewall and under  
the tread.  
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters  
and numbers following the DOT (Department of  
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification  
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer  
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire  
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both  
sides of the tire, although only one side may have  
the date of manufacture.  
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:  
Maximum load that can be carried and the  
maximum pressure needed to support that load.  
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or  
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi  
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure  
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on  
page 374.  
Compact Spare Tire Example  
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare  
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of  
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should  
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).  
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when  
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.  
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire,  
see Compact Spare Tire on page 398 and  
If a Tire Goes Flat on page 385.  
369  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and  
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,  
construction type, and service description. The  
letter T as the first character in the tire size means  
the tire is for temporary use only.  
means a passenger vehicle tire engineered  
to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim  
Association.  
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates  
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall  
to sidewall.  
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria  
Specification): Original equipment tires designed  
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have  
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.  
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all  
federal safety guidelines.  
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that  
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.  
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is  
60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would  
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as  
high as it is wide.  
Tire Size  
The following illustration shows an example of a  
typical passenger vehicle tire size.  
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to  
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.  
The letter R means radial ply construction;  
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply  
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias  
ply construction.  
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel  
in inches.  
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United  
States version of a metric tire sizing system.  
The letter P as the first character in the tire size  
370  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(F) Service Description: These characters  
represent the load range and speed rating of the  
tire. The load index represents the load carry  
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index  
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is  
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a  
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.  
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped  
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.  
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies  
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees  
to the centerline of the tread.  
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure  
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch  
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up  
heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure  
on page 374.  
Tire Terminology and Definitions  
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire  
pressing outward on each square inch of the  
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds  
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).  
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor  
vehicle with standard and optional equipment  
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and  
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.  
Accessory Weight: This means the combined  
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of  
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,  
power steering, power brakes, power windows,  
power seats, and air conditioning.  
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall  
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance  
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)  
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code  
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),  
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify  
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,  
and date of production.  
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height  
to its width.  
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is  
located between the plies and the tread. Cords  
may be made from steel or other reinforcing  
materials.  
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See  
Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.  
371  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the  
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.  
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of  
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity  
weight, and production options weight.  
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the  
rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.  
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of  
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied  
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle  
on page 279.  
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an  
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward  
when mounted on a vehicle.  
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating  
positions.  
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.  
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on  
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger  
vehicles.  
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an  
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that  
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.  
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears  
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,  
and/or model name molding that is higher  
or deeper than the same moldings on the  
other sidewall of the tire.  
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from  
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying  
capacity of a tire.  
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air  
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.  
The maximum air pressure is molded onto  
the sidewall.  
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on  
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and  
multipurpose vehicles.  
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire  
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure  
for that tire.  
372  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle  
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation  
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See  
Your Vehicle on page 279.  
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
Standards): A tire information system that  
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s  
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings  
are determined by tire manufacturers using  
government testing procedures. The ratings are  
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform  
Tire Quality Grading on page 380.  
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the  
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at  
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.  
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of  
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs  
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading  
Your Vehicle on page 279.  
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which  
the tire beads are seated.  
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread  
and the bead.  
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on  
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory  
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.  
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned  
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at  
which a tire can operate.  
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to  
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight  
and the original equipment tire size and  
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and  
Loading Information Label” under Loading  
Your Vehicle on page 279.  
Traction: The friction between the tire and the  
road surface. The amount of grip provided.  
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into  
contact with the road.  
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes  
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a  
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.  
373  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to  
the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This label shows  
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the  
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they  
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation  
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum  
amount of air pressure needed to support your  
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.  
Inflation - Tire Pressure  
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to  
operate effectively.  
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that  
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.  
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air  
(under-inflation), you can get the following:  
For additional information regarding how much  
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example  
of the Tire and Loading Information label,  
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 279. How you  
load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and  
ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more  
weight than it was designed to carry.  
Too much flexing  
Too much heat  
Tire overloading  
Premature or irregular wear  
Poor handling  
Reduced fuel economy  
When to Check  
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),  
you can get the following:  
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not  
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be  
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information  
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact  
Spare Tire on page 398.  
Unusual wear  
Poor handling  
Rough ride  
Needless damage from road hazards  
374  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve  
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt  
and moisture.  
How to Check  
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check  
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are  
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial  
tires may look properly inflated even when they  
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation  
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your  
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours  
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).  
Tire Inspection and Rotation  
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles  
(8 000 to 13 000 km).  
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your  
tires as soon as possible and check wheel  
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.  
and Wheel Replacement on page 382 for  
more information.  
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.  
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to  
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire  
inflation pressure matches the recommended  
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information  
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the  
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the  
recommended amount.  
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve  
more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The  
first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled  
Maintenance on page 420.  
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on  
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.  
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.  
375  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When towing your vehicle with all four wheels  
on the ground, the vehicle’s odometer will  
not record the miles generated while towing.  
Keep a record of how many miles your vehicle  
was towed so they can be added to the mileage  
on the vehicle’s odometer when following your  
maintenance schedule for recommended services.  
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front  
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the  
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading  
Your Vehicle on page 279.  
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly  
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under  
{CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to  
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts  
become loose after time. The wheel could  
come off and cause an accident. When  
you change a wheel, remove any rust or  
dirt from places where the wheel attaches  
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can  
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;  
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush  
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt  
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 386.  
When rotating your tires, always use the correct  
rotation pattern shown here.  
Do not include the compact spare tire in your  
tire rotation.  
376  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or  
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.  
When It Is Time for New Tires  
One way to tell when it  
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.  
is time for new tires is  
to check the treadwear  
indicators, which will  
appear when your tires  
have only 1/16 inch  
(1.6 mm) or less of  
tread remaining.  
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage  
that cannot be repaired well because of the  
size or location of the damage.  
Buying New Tires  
GM has developed and matched specific tires  
for your vehicle. The original equipment tires  
installed on your vehicle, when it was new,  
were designed to meet General Motors Tire  
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)  
system rating. If you need replacement tires,  
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with  
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle  
will continue to have tires that are designed to  
give the same performance and vehicle safety,  
during normal use, as the original tires.  
You need a new tire if any of the following  
statements are true:  
You can see the indicators at three or more  
places around the tire.  
You can see cord or fabric showing through  
the tire’s rubber.  
377  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over  
a dozen critical specifications that impact the  
overall performance of your vehicle, including  
brake system performance, ride and handling,  
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring  
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded  
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.  
If the tires have an all-season tread design,  
the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS  
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling  
on page 367 for additional information.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
brands, or types may also cause damage  
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct  
size, brand, and type of tires on all  
wheels. It is all right to drive with your  
compact spare temporarily, as it was  
developed for use on your vehicle.  
See Compact Spare Tire on page 398.  
{CAUTION:  
{CAUTION:  
Mixing tires could cause you to lose  
control while driving. If you mix tires of  
different sizes, brands, or types (radial  
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not  
handle properly, and you could have a  
crash. Using tires of different sizes,  
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,  
the wheel rim flanges could develop  
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire  
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing  
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the  
wheels on your vehicle.  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
378  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those  
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make  
sure they are the same size, load range, speed  
rating, and construction type (radial and  
{CAUTION:  
If you add different sized wheels, your  
vehicle may not provide an acceptable  
level of performance and safety if tires  
not recommended for those wheels are  
selected. You may increase the chance  
that you will crash and suffer serious  
injury. Only use Saturn specific wheel and  
tire systems developed for your vehicle,  
and have them properly installed by a  
Saturn certified technician.  
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.  
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed  
on the Tire and Loading Information label.  
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar  
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279,  
for more information about the Tire and Loading  
Information label and its location on your vehicle.  
Different Size Tires and Wheels  
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size  
than your original equipment wheels and tires, this  
may affect the way your vehicle performs, including  
its braking, ride and handling characteristics,  
stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally,  
if your vehicle has electronic systems such as,  
anti-lock brakes, traction control, and stability  
control, the performance of these systems can  
be affected.  
See Buying New Tires on page 377 and  
additional information.  
379  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
While the tires available on General Motors  
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with  
respect to these grades, they must also conform  
to federal safety requirements and additional  
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)  
standards.  
Uniform Tire Quality Grading  
Quality grades can be found where applicable on  
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and  
maximum section width. For example:  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
Treadwear  
The following information relates to the system  
developed by the United States National Highway  
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which  
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and  
temperature performance. This applies only to  
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are  
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car  
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)  
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type  
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use  
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of  
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some  
limited-production tires.  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating  
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested  
under controlled conditions on a specified  
government test course. For example, a tire  
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times  
as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires  
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,  
however, and may depart significantly from  
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service  
practices, and differences in road characteristics  
and climate.  
380  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Traction – AA, A, B, C  
Temperature – A, B, C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,  
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s  
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under  
controlled conditions on specified government test  
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C  
may have poor traction performance.  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,  
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to  
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate  
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained  
high temperature can cause the material of the tire  
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive  
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.  
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under  
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard  
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels  
of performance on the laboratory test wheel  
than the minimum required by law.  
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this  
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction  
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,  
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.  
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is  
established for a tire that is properly inflated  
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,  
underinflation, or excessive loading, either  
separately or in combination, can cause heat  
buildup and possible tire failure.  
381  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance  
Wheel Replacement  
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned  
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you  
the longest tire life and best overall performance.  
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire  
balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.  
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your  
vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the  
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly  
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming  
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts  
should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace  
it (except some aluminum wheels, which can  
sometimes be repaired). See your dealer/retailer  
if any of these conditions exist.  
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice  
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth  
road, your tires and wheels may need to be  
rebalanced. See your retailer for proper diagnosis.  
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel  
you need.  
Each new wheel should have the same  
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and  
be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.  
382  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel  
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with  
new Saturn original equipment parts. This way,  
you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel  
bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.  
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause  
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,  
speedometer or odometer calibration,  
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground  
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance  
to the body and chassis.  
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 386 for more  
information.  
{CAUTION:  
Used Replacement Wheels  
Using the wrong replacement wheels,  
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle  
can be dangerous. It could affect the  
braking and handling of your vehicle,  
make your tires lose air and make you  
lose control. You could have a collision  
in which you or others could be injured.  
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,  
and wheel nuts for replacement.  
{CAUTION:  
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is  
dangerous. You cannot know how it has  
been used or how far it has been driven.  
It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.  
If you have to replace a wheel, use a new  
Saturn original equipment wheel.  
383  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire Chains  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,  
readjust, or remove the device if it is  
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin  
your wheels.  
{CAUTION:  
If your vehicle has P235/65R16, P235/  
60R17, or P245/50R18 size tires, do not use  
tire chains. They can damage your vehicle  
because there is not enough clearance.  
If you do find traction devices that will fit,  
install them on the front tires.  
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the  
proper amount of clearance can cause  
damage to the brakes, suspension, or other  
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire  
chains could cause you to lose control of  
your vehicle and you or others may be  
injured in a crash.  
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than  
P235/65R16, P235/60R17, or P245/50R18 size  
tires, use tire chains only where legal and only  
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type  
chains that are the proper size for your tires.  
Install them on the front tires and tighten them  
as tightly as possible with the ends securely  
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain  
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear  
the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and  
retighten them. If the contact continues, slow  
down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning  
the wheels with chains on will damage your  
vehicle.  
Use another type of traction device only if  
its manufacturer recommends it for use  
on your vehicle and tire size combination  
and road conditions. Follow that  
manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
384  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If a Tire Goes Flat  
{CAUTION:  
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are  
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s  
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is  
much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you  
should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips  
about what to expect and what to do:  
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to  
do maintenance or repairs is dangerous  
without the appropriate safety equipment  
and training. The jack provided with your  
vehicle is designed only for changing a  
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you  
or others could be badly injured or killed  
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the  
jack provided with your vehicle only for  
changing a flat tire.  
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag  
that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take  
your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the  
steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane  
position, and then gently brake to a stop well  
out of the traffic lane.  
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much  
like a skid and may require the same correction  
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout  
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.  
Get the vehicle under control by steering the  
way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very  
bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently  
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.  
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the  
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.  
385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing a Flat Tire  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel  
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on  
your hazard warning flashers.  
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart  
while the vehicle is raised.  
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in  
the vehicle.  
{CAUTION:  
To be even more certain the vehicle will  
not move, you should put blocks at the  
front and rear of the tire farthest away  
from the one being changed. That would  
be the tire on the other side, at the  
opposite end of the vehicle.  
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The  
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over  
or fall on you or other people. You and  
they could be badly injured or even killed.  
Find a level place to change your tire. To  
help prevent the vehicle from moving:  
1. Set the parking brake firmly.  
When you have a flat tire, use the following  
example as a guide to assist you in the placement  
of wheel blocks.  
2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever  
in PARK (P), or shift a manual  
transaxle to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).  
CAUTION: (Continued)  
386  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools  
The tools you will need are located on the  
driver’s side of the rear cargo area. To access the  
tools, do the following:  
1. Remove the  
wing-bolt from  
the jack.  
The following information will tell you how to use  
the jack and change a tire.  
2. Remove the jack and wheel wrench.  
3. Remove the straps holding the bag containing  
the wheel wrench. Then remove the wheel  
wrench from the bag.  
4. Fold out the socket portion of the wrench from  
the handle.  
387  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To access the spare tire, do the following:  
2. Remove the forward floor panel of the load  
floor cargo organizer and place it in the  
1. Lift the forward floor panel of the load floor  
cargo organizer.  
vehicle while you are removing the spare tire.  
388  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Open the floor cargo organizer locks, located  
on the top left and right corners of the  
organizer, by pushing inward on them.  
4. Remove the load floor cargo organizer.  
389  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Remove the wheel retainer bolt holding down  
the spare tire by turning it counterclockwise.  
The tools you will be using include the jack (A)  
and wheel wrench (B).  
6. Remove the compact spare tire. See Compact  
Spare Tire on page 398 for more information.  
390  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When reinstalling full plastic covers or center  
caps, tighten all the plastic caps hand snug, then  
tighten with the wheel wrench an additional  
one-quarter of a turn.  
Removing the Flat Tire and  
Installing the Spare Tire  
The wheel cover or hubcap needs to be removed  
in order to reach the wheel bolts.  
1. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel  
nuts. Do not remove them yet.  
For steel wheels with full plastic covers and  
aluminum wheels with large circular center caps,  
do the following:  
2. Attach the wheel  
wrench to the jack  
bolt head and  
1. It is recommended that a safety check is done  
before preceding. See Changing a Flat Tire  
on page 386 for more information.  
rotate the wheel  
wrench clockwise.  
That will raise the lift  
head a little.  
2. Loosen all plastic  
caps by turning the  
wheel wrench  
counterclockwise.  
Do not try to remove  
plastic caps from  
the cover or  
center cap.  
3. Pull the cover or center cap away from the  
wheel and place it in the trunk.  
391  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
{CAUTION:  
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked  
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off  
the jack you could be badly injured or  
killed. Never get under a vehicle when  
it is supported only by a jack.  
{CAUTION:  
3. Position the lift head at the jack location  
nearest the flat tire. Make sure all of the  
jack lift head is touching the jacking flange  
under the body. Do not place the jack under a  
body panel. The lower body panel has an  
arrow to aid in locating the jacking location.  
Raising your vehicle with the jack  
improperly positioned can damage the  
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall.  
To help avoid personal injury and vehicle  
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head  
into the proper location before raising  
the vehicle.  
4. Put the compact spare tire near you.  
392  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
{CAUTION:  
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do  
maintenance or repairs is dangerous  
without the appropriate safety equipment  
and training. The jack provided with your  
vehicle is designed only for changing a  
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you  
or others could be badly injured or killed  
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the  
jack provided with your vehicle only for  
changing a flat tire.  
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle  
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off  
the ground so there is enough room for  
the road tire to be removed.  
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is  
in the correct position or you may damage your  
vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by  
your warranty.  
393  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Remove all of the  
wheel nuts.  
{CAUTION:  
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts  
to which it is fastened, can make the  
wheel nuts become loose after time.  
The wheel could come off and cause an  
accident. When changing a wheel, remove  
any rust or dirt from the places where  
the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an  
emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can  
be used to do this; but be sure to use a  
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to  
get all the rust or dirt off.  
7. Take off the flat tire.  
394  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Remove any rust or  
dirt from the wheel  
bolts, mounting  
surfaces and  
spare wheel.  
9. Place the compact spare tire on the  
wheel-mounting surface.  
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle  
counterclockwise.  
{CAUTION:  
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.  
Because the nuts might come loose. The  
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a  
serious accident.  
10. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by  
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.  
395  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. Tighten the wheel  
nuts firmly in a  
{CAUTION:  
crisscross sequence,  
as shown.  
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly  
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel  
to come loose and even come off. This  
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use  
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to  
replace them, be sure to get new GM  
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop  
somewhere as soon as you can and have  
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench  
to the proper torque specification. See  
for wheel nut torque specification.  
13. Lower the jack all the way and remove the  
jack from under the vehicle.  
14. Tighten the bolts firmly with the wheel wrench.  
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your  
vehicle’s compact spare. If you try to put a  
wheel cover on the compact spare, the cover or  
the spare could be damaged.  
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can  
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.  
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly  
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence  
and to the proper torque specification. See  
the wheel nut torque specification.  
396  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Install the jack in the  
driver’s side panel of  
the rear cargo  
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire  
and Tools  
area and secure  
with the wing bolt.  
{CAUTION:  
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment  
in the passenger compartment of the  
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden  
stop or collision, loose equipment could  
strike someone. Store all these in the  
proper place.  
To store the flat or spare tire and tools, do the  
following:  
1. Place the wheel wrench into the bag and use  
the straps to secure the bag to the fully  
collapsed jack.  
3. Remove the wheel stow rod from the upper  
left side of the floor compartment.  
397  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Screw the threaded wheel stow rod onto the  
spare tire bracket. The final position of the  
wheel stow rod must be rotated to the farthest  
forward position so that the top of the rod  
faces forward.  
Compact Spare Tire  
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated  
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after  
a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.  
It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).  
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 under Removing  
the Spare Tire and Tools on page 387 to  
replace the floor cargo organizer and lock  
in place.  
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,  
stop as soon as possible and make sure the  
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare  
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph  
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles  
(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have  
the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your  
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the  
spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible.  
The spare tire will last longer and be in good  
shape in case it is needed again.  
6. Place the flat, or damaged tire, face down, on  
the load floor with the threaded wheel stow  
rod sticking up through the center hole of the  
load floor and center hole of the wheel.  
Vehicles equipped with the 3.5L V6 (L66)  
engine and aluminum wheels, must remove the  
center cap from the wheel prior to placing it on  
the load floor. To remove the center cap, tap  
the cap from the backside of the wheel, then  
place the wheel on the load floor.  
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,  
do not take your vehicle through an automatic  
car wash with guide rails. The compact  
spare can get caught on the rails. That can  
damage the tire and wheel, and maybe  
other parts of your vehicle.  
7. Place the wheel retainer bolt onto the wheel  
stow rod and tighten.  
The compact spare is for temporary use only.  
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire  
as soon as you can.  
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.  
398  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel  
with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.  
Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.  
Lighter colored interiors may require more  
frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers  
and garments that transfer color to your home  
furnishings may also transfer color to your  
vehicle’s interior.  
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact  
spare. Using them can damage your vehicle  
and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire  
chains on your compact spare.  
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use  
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces  
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result  
from using cleaners on surfaces for which  
they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on  
glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from  
other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,  
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.  
Appearance Care  
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle  
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its  
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always  
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your  
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,  
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is  
recommended to remove particles from your  
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery  
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.  
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.  
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes  
of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.  
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when  
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you  
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage  
to the rear window defogger. When cleaning  
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth  
and glass cleaner.  
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become  
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.  
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all  
safety instructions on the label. While cleaning your  
vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation by  
opening your vehicle’s doors and windows.  
399  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dust may be removed from small buttons and  
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.  
Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while  
cleaning.  
Your retailer has a product for cleaning your  
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you  
can also obtain a product from your retailer to  
remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.  
Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result  
from the use of many organic solvents such as  
naptha, alcohol, etc.  
Fabric/Carpet  
Do not clean your vehicle using the following  
cleaners or techniques:  
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush  
Never use a knife or any other sharp object to  
remove a soil from any interior surface.  
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose  
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in  
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and  
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove  
them first with plain water or club soda. Before  
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil  
as possible using one of the following techniques:  
Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage  
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.  
Never apply heavy pressure or rub  
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of  
heavy pressure can damage your interior and  
does not improve the effectiveness of soil  
removal.  
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a  
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the  
paper towel until no more can be removed.  
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid  
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with  
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave a  
residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.  
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon  
(3.78 L) of water is a good guide.  
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible  
and then vacuum.  
400  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To clean, use the following instructions:  
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other  
Plastic Surfaces  
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with  
water or club soda.  
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to  
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is  
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a  
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove  
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers  
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and  
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect  
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the  
appearance and feel of your interior and are  
not recommended. Do not use silicone or  
wax-based products, or those containing organic  
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because  
they can alter the appearance by increasing  
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.  
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.  
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently  
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,  
using a clean area of the cloth each time it  
becomes soiled.  
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the  
cleaning cloth remains clean.  
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a  
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning  
process that was used with plain water.  
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric  
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a  
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be  
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness  
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any  
impression that a ring formation may result,  
clean the entire surface.  
Some commercial products may increase gloss  
on your instrument panel. The increase in  
gloss may cause annoying reflections in the  
windshield and even make it difficult to see  
through the windshield under certain conditions.  
After the cleaning process has been completed, a  
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture  
from the fabric or carpet.  
401  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Care of Safety Belts  
Washing Your Vehicle  
Keep belts clean and dry.  
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty,  
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.  
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to  
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm  
or cold water.  
{CAUTION:  
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you  
do, it may severely weaken them. In a  
crash, they might not be able to provide  
adequate protection. Clean safety belts  
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.  
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of  
the sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong  
soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the  
vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.  
You can get approved cleaning products from your  
page 407. Do not use cleaning agents that are  
petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives.  
All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and  
not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could  
stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or  
an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and  
water spotting.  
Weatherstrips  
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them  
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.  
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During  
very cold, damp weather frequent application may  
be required. See Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants on page 432.  
High pressure car washes may cause water to  
enter your vehicle.  
402  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive  
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint  
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive  
waxes and polishes that are made for a  
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.  
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses  
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and  
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps  
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing  
Your Vehicle on page 402.  
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and  
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree  
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial  
chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if  
they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle  
as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive  
cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces  
to remove foreign matter.  
Finish Care  
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your  
vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove  
residue from the paint finish. You can get approved  
cleaning products from your Saturn retailer. See  
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,  
weather, and chemical fallout that can take their toll  
over a period of years. You can help to keep the  
paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle in a  
garage or covered whenever possible.  
Your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint  
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss  
to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes  
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made  
for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.  
403  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Windshield and Wiper Blades  
Aluminum Wheels  
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim  
may be damaged if you do not wash your  
vehicle after driving on roads that have been  
sprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodium  
chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for  
conditions such as ice and dust. Always wash  
your vehicle’s chrome with soap and water  
after exposure.  
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass  
cleaner.  
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or  
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or  
a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly  
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime,  
sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments  
may cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper  
blades if they are worn or damaged.  
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,  
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or  
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or  
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the  
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would not  
be covered by your warranty. Use only  
approved cleaners on aluminum or  
Wipers can be damaged by:  
Extreme dusty conditions  
Sand and salt  
Heat and sun  
chrome-plated wheels.  
Snow and ice, without proper removal  
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth  
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.  
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean  
towel. A wax may then be applied.  
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum  
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs  
would not be covered by your warranty.  
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.  
404  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The surface of these wheels is similar to the  
painted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong  
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive  
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning  
brushes on them because the surface could  
be damaged. Do not use chrome polish on  
aluminum wheels.  
Sheet Metal Damage  
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet  
metal repair or replacement, make sure the body  
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to  
parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion  
protection.  
Original manufacturer replacement parts will  
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining  
the warranty.  
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an  
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide  
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage the  
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs  
would not be covered by your warranty. Never  
drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or  
chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car  
wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning  
brushes.  
Finish Damage  
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in  
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare  
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into  
major repair expense.  
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with  
touch-up materials available from your Saturn  
retailer. Larger areas of finish damage can  
be corrected in your Saturn retailer’s body and  
paint shop.  
Tires  
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire  
cleaner.  
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing  
products on your vehicle may damage the  
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire  
dressing, always wipe off any overspray  
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.  
405  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Underbody Maintenance  
Chemical Paint Spotting  
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and  
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these  
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop  
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,  
frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though  
they have corrosion protection.  
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can  
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can  
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your  
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,  
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular  
dark spots etched into the paint surface.  
At least every spring, flush these materials from  
the underbody with plain water. Clean any  
areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt  
packed in close areas of the frame should  
be loosened before being flushed. Your Saturn  
retailer or an underbody car washing system can  
do this for you.  
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,  
we will repair, at no charge to the owner, the  
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout  
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles  
(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.  
406  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials  
Description  
Usage  
Removes swirl marks, fine  
scratches, and other light  
surface contamination.  
Description  
Usage  
Swirl Remover Polish  
Polishing Cloth  
Wax-Treated  
Interior and exterior  
polishing cloth.  
Removes light scratches  
and protects finish.  
Cleaner Wax  
Tar and Road  
Oil Remover  
Removes tar, road oil,  
and asphalt.  
Cleans, shines, and  
protects in one easy step.  
No wiping necessary.  
Foaming Tire Shine  
Low Gloss  
Chrome Cleaner  
and Polish  
Use on chrome or  
stainless steel.  
Medium foaming  
shampoo. Cleans and  
lightly waxes.  
White Sidewall  
Tire Cleaner  
Removes soil and black  
marks from whitewalls.  
Wash Wax Concentrate  
Biodegradable and  
phosphate free.  
Vinyl Cleaner  
Glass Cleaner  
Cleans vinyl.  
Removes dirt, grime,  
smoke, and fingerprints.  
Quickly and easily  
removes spots and stains  
from carpets, vinyl, and  
cloth upholstery.  
Spot Lifter  
Removes dirt and grime  
from chrome wheels and  
wire wheel covers.  
Chrome and Wire  
Wheel Cleaner  
Odorless spray odor  
eliminator used on fabrics,  
vinyl, leather, and carpet.  
Odor Eliminator  
Removes dust,  
fingerprints, and surface  
contaminants. Spray on  
wipe off.  
Finish Enhancer  
407  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Identification  
Vehicle Identification  
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine  
code. This code helps you identify your vehicle’s  
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Service Parts Identification Label  
This label is on the rear edge of the driver  
side rear door. It is very helpful if you ever  
need to order parts. The label has the following  
information:  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  
Model designation  
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It  
appears on a plate in the front corner of the  
instrument panel, on the driver side. You can  
see it if you look through the windshield from  
outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on  
the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and  
the certificates of title and registration.  
Paint information  
Production options and special equipment  
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.  
408  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Windows and Other  
Power Options  
Electrical System  
Add-On Electrical Equipment  
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the  
power windows and other power accessories.  
When the current load is too heavy, the circuit  
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit  
until the problem is fixed.  
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your  
vehicle unless you check with your retailer  
first. Some electrical equipment can damage  
your vehicle and the damage would not  
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on  
electrical equipment can keep other  
Fuses and Circuit Breakers  
components from working as they should.  
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected  
from short circuits by fuses. This greatly reduces  
the chance of circuit overload and fire caused  
by electrical problems.  
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before  
attempting to add anything electrical to your  
Vehicle on page 88.  
There are two fuse blocks — the underhood fuse  
block, and the instrument panel fuse block.  
Windshield Wiper Fuses  
To identify and check fuses and relays, refer to  
the Fuse Usage Chart on the inside surface of the  
fuse panel door.  
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a  
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats  
due to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop  
until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by  
some electrical problem, have it fixed.  
409  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Instrument Panel Fuse Block  
Fuses  
CRUISE  
EPS  
Usage  
Cruise Control Switch, Brake Switch  
Electronic Power Steering  
Instrument Cluster, Brake  
Transmission Shift Interlock  
Solenoid, Traction Switch, Fog  
Lamp Switch  
IGN 1  
Power Door Locks, Power Mirror,  
Entry Control  
LOCK/MIRROR  
BCM  
Body Control Module, Front Wipers,  
Windows, Sunroof  
BCM (IGN 1) Body Control Module  
AIR BAG  
Sensing and Diagnostic Module  
Radio, Power Mirror, Premium  
Radio Amplifier  
RADIO (IGN)  
TURN  
HVAC  
Turn Lamps  
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the  
passenger’s side of the lower console.  
HVAC Control Head  
Hazard Lamps  
HAZARD  
HTD SEATS Heated Seats  
RADIO  
Radio, Data Link Connector  
Park Lamps, Taillamps, Side Marker  
Lamps, License Lamps  
PARK  
410  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Underhood Fuse Block  
Fuses  
Usage  
Body Control Module, Instrument  
Cluster  
BCM/CLUSTER  
INT LTS  
DR LKS  
Body Control Module, OnStar®  
Door Locks  
Relays  
Usage  
AFTER BLOW Not Used  
HVAC  
HVAC Control Head  
BLOWER  
PK LP  
Parking Lamps  
DR LCK  
All Door Lock Switch  
The underhood fuse block is located in the  
forward part of the engine compartment near  
the battery.  
PSG DR  
UNLCK  
Passenger Door Unlock Switch  
DRV DR  
UNLCK  
Driver Door Unlock Switch  
Headlamps  
Fuses  
Usage  
Battery Voltage to ECM, TCM, PCM  
(3.5L V6 (L66))  
HDLP  
ECM/TCM  
BATT FEED Instrument Panel Fuse Box  
HORN  
* *  
Horn  
Emissions  
411  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fuses  
Usage  
Fuses  
Usage  
ABS PWR  
Anti-lock Brake System Battery  
Engine Ignition Module, Fuel  
Injectors (2.2L L4 (L61))  
Camshaft Sensor, Main Relay  
Voltage To PCM, Ignition Coils 1-6  
IGN/INJ (L4),  
ECM/  
CAM (V6)  
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger  
COOL HI (L4)/ Cooling Fans High (L4)/Cooling  
COOL 1 (V6) Fan 1 (V6)  
INJECTORS  
(3.5L V6 (L66))  
Fuel Injection  
FOG LP  
LH HDLP  
RR WIPER  
ABS  
Fog Lamps  
Driver’s Side Headlamp  
Rear Wiper  
Engine Control Module (ECM),  
Transaxle Control Module (TCM),  
Transaxle, L66 Powertrain Control  
Module (PCM)  
PWR TRAIN  
BACKUP  
Anti-lock Brake System Module  
PWR WDW Power Window Relay and Sunroof  
CIGAR/AUX2 Cigarette Lighter  
Low Coolant Switch, Backup Lamps  
(2.2L L4 (L61)), Vehicle Speed  
Sensor (Manual), Transaxle Range  
Switch (2.2L L4 (L61))  
HVAC  
HVAC Blower Motor  
BLOWER  
HTD SEATS Heated Seats  
COOL  
RH HDLP  
Right Headlamp  
FRT WIPER Front Wiper  
Cooling Fan Low (L4), Cooling  
LO (L4)/  
COOL 2 (V6)  
Fan (V6)  
Engine Control Module (ECM),  
Electronic Throttle Control (V6)  
ETC  
Air Conditioning Clutch, Back Up  
Lamps (3.5L V6 (L66))  
A/C CLUTCH  
SUNROOF  
BRAKE  
IGN  
Sunroof Module  
Stoplamps  
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump  
AUX 1  
Ignition switch  
Front Auxiliary Power Outlet  
OUTLET  
412  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
PREM AUD Premium Radio Amplifier  
ABS Anti-lock Brake System Ignition  
Usage  
Relays  
Usage  
Power Window Switch, Sunroof  
Module  
PRW WDO  
FRT WIPER Front Wiper System  
PWR SEAT Power Seats  
COOL FAN  
Cooling Fan Motor Low  
LOW (L4)  
A/C CLUTCH Air Conditioning Clutch  
Relays  
Usage  
BACKUP  
FOG LP  
Fog Lamps  
Back-up Lamps (V6)  
LAMPS (V6)  
COOL FAN  
HI (L4)  
Cooling Fan Motor High  
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump System  
RR WIPER  
Rear Wiper System  
Engine Control Module/CAM,  
Emissions, Injectors, Electronic  
Throttle Control  
ENG MAIN  
COOL  
FAN 2 (V6)  
Cooling Fan (V6)  
REAR DEFOG Rear Defog System  
Misc.  
Usage  
HORN  
DRL  
Horn  
FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller  
Diode Air Conditioning Diode  
Daytime Running Lamps  
COOL  
FAN 1 (V6)  
Cooling Fan  
WIPER  
SYSTEM  
Wiper System  
413  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Capacities and Specifications  
Application  
Capacities  
English  
Metric  
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge  
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located  
under the hood. See your dealer for more  
information.  
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a  
Cooling System  
2.2L L4 Automatic Engine  
2.2L L4 Manual Engine  
3.5L V6 Engine  
8.8 qt  
9.1 qt  
10.3 qt  
8.3 L  
8.6 L  
9.7 L  
Engine Oil with Filter  
2.2L L4 Engine  
5.0 qt  
4.5 qt  
4.7 L  
4.3 L  
3.5L V6 Engine  
Fuel Tank  
16.6 gal  
62.8 L  
Transaxle  
Five-Speed Automatic  
Five-Speed Automatic AWD  
Four-Speed Automatic  
Five-Speed Manual  
Wheel Nut Torque  
4.5 qt  
4.1 qt  
7.0 qt  
4.3 L  
3.9 L  
6.6 L  
1.7 qt  
1.6 L  
100 ft lb  
140 Y  
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this  
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.  
414  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Specifications  
Engine  
VIN Code  
Transaxle  
Spark Plug Gap  
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)  
0.043 inches (1.1 mm)  
Automatic  
Manual  
2.2L L4 (L61)  
3.5L V6 (L66)  
D
4
Automatic  
415  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
416  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your Vehicle and the Environment  
Maintenance Schedule  
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to  
keep your vehicle in good working condition, but  
also helps the environment. All recommended  
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle  
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air  
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire  
inflation can increase the level of emissions from  
your vehicle. To help protect our environment,  
and to keep your vehicle in good condition,  
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.  
Introduction  
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level  
and change as recommended.  
Maintenance Requirements  
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,  
inspections, replacement parts, and  
recommended fluids and lubricants as  
prescribed in this manual are necessary to  
keep your vehicle in good working condition.  
Any damage caused by failure to follow  
scheduled maintenance might not be covered  
by warranty.  
Using the Maintenance Schedule  
We at Saturn want to help you keep your vehicle  
in good working condition. But we do not know  
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive  
very short distances only a few times a week.  
Or you may drive long distances all the time  
in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your  
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive  
it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.  
418  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Because of all the different ways people use  
their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may  
need more frequent checks and replacements.  
So please read the following and note how  
you drive. If you have any questions on how to  
keep your vehicle in good condition, see your  
Saturn retailer.  
{CAUTION:  
Performing maintenance work on a  
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do  
some jobs, you can be seriously injured.  
Do your own maintenance work only if  
you have the required know-how and the  
proper tools and equipment for the job.  
If you have any doubt, see your retailer to  
have a qualified technician do the work.  
page 305.  
This schedule is for vehicles that:  
carry passengers and cargo within  
recommended limits. You will find these limits  
on the Tire and Loading Information label.  
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 279.  
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within  
legal driving limits.  
are driven off-road in the recommended  
Some maintenance services can be complex.  
So, unless you are technically qualified and have  
the necessary equipment, you should have  
your Saturn retailer do these jobs.  
manner. See Off-Road Driving on page 247.  
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline  
Octane on page 306.  
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on  
page 420 should be performed when indicated.  
See Additional Required Services on page 423 and  
Maintenance Footnotes on page 425 for further  
information.  
When you go to your Saturn retailer for your  
service needs, you will know that Saturn-trained  
and supported service technicians will perform the  
work using genuine Saturn parts.  
419  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you want to purchase service information, see  
page 453.  
Scheduled Maintenance  
When the Change Engine Oil light comes on, it  
means that service is required for your vehicle.  
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible  
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible  
that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the  
engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle  
service is necessary for over a year. However, the  
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once  
a year and at this time the system must be reset.  
Your Saturn retailer has Saturn-trained service  
technicians who will perform this work using  
genuine Saturn parts and reset the system.  
Owner Checks and Services on page 427 tells you  
what should be checked, when to check it, and  
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle  
in good condition.  
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and  
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended  
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these  
are used. All parts should be replaced and all  
necessary repairs done before you or anyone  
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use  
of genuine Saturn parts.  
If the engine oil life system is ever reset  
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within  
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.  
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever  
the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on  
page 323 for information on the Engine Oil Life  
System and resetting the system.  
420  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the Change Engine Oil light appears,  
certain services, checks, and inspections are  
required. Required services are described in the  
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”  
Generally, it is recommended that your first  
service be Maintenance I, your second service  
be Maintenance II, and that you alternate  
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.  
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may  
be required more often.  
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the  
Change Engine Oil light comes on within 10  
months since the vehicle was purchased or  
Maintenance II was performed.  
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the  
previous service performed was Maintenance I.  
Always use Maintenance II whenever the light  
comes on 10 months or more since the last service  
or if the light has not come on at all for one year.  
Scheduled Maintenance  
Service  
Maintenance I Maintenance II  
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 318. Reset oil life system.  
See Engine Oil Life System on page 323. An Emission Control Service.  
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).  
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter.  
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 324. See footnote (l).  
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and  
Rotation on page 375 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month  
on page 428.  
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).  
421  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)  
Service  
Maintenance I Maintenance II  
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid  
as needed.  
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”  
in this section.  
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).  
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).  
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).  
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).  
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).  
Automatic Transaxle Only: Check automatic transaxle fluid level and  
add fluid as needed.  
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (k).  
L4 engine: Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).  
422  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Required Services  
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated  
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.  
Additional Required Services  
25,000  
(40 000)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)  
Inspect fuel system for damage  
or leaks.  
Inspect exhaust system for loose or  
damaged components.  
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See  
L4 engine: Change automatic transaxle  
fluid (severe service). See footnote (h).  
L4 engine: Change automatic transaxle  
fluid (normal service).  
V6 engine: Change automatic transaxle  
fluid (severe service). See footnote (h).  
V6 engine: Change automatic transaxle  
fluid (normal service). See footnote (m).  
Replace spark plugs. An Emission  
Control Service.  
423  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Required Services (cont’d)  
25,000  
(40 000)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)  
V6 engine: Replace timing belt (normal  
service). An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote †.  
V6 engine: Replace timing belt (severe  
service). An Emission Control Service.  
See footnotes † and (n).  
L4 engine: Change rear drive module  
and power takeoff unit fluid (severe  
service). See footnote (h).  
L4 engine: Change rear drive module  
and power takeoff unit fluid (normal  
service).  
V6 engine: Change transfer assembly  
fluid (severe service). See footnote (h).  
V6 engine: Change transfer assembly  
fluid (normal service). See footnote (m).  
V6 engine: Change rear drive module  
fluid (severe service). See footnote (h).  
V6 engine: Change rear drive module  
fluid (normal service).  
424  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Required Services (cont’d)  
25,000  
(40 000)  
50,000  
75,000  
100,000  
125,000  
150,000  
Service and Miles (Kilometers)  
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)  
V6 engine: Inspect valve clearance.  
Engine cooling system service (or every  
five years, whichever occurs first).  
An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote (i).  
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.  
An Emission Control Service.  
See footnote (p).  
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for  
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,  
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and  
rotors for surface condition. Inspect drum brake  
linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect other  
brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,  
calipers, parking brake, etc.  
Maintenance Footnotes  
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the  
California Air Resources Board has determined that  
the failure to perform this maintenance item will not  
nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability  
prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.  
We, however, urge that all recommended  
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and  
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing  
parts or signs of wear.  
maintenance services be performed at the indicated  
intervals and the maintenance be recorded.  
425  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced  
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.  
Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with  
genuine Saturn parts as needed. To help ensure  
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling  
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside  
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is  
recommended at least once a year.  
required when exposed to a corrosive  
environment. Applying silicone grease on  
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them  
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.  
(g) Check system for interference or binding  
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace  
parts as needed. Replace any components that  
have high effort or excessive wear.  
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or  
cracking. Replace wiper blades that appear  
worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas  
of the windshield.  
(h) Severe service is when the vehicle is mainly  
driven under one or more of these conditions:  
In heavy city traffic where the outside  
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)  
or higher.  
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all  
your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and  
anchorages are working properly. Look for any  
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.  
If you see anything that might keep a safety belt  
system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have  
any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also look  
for any opened or broken airbag coverings, and  
have them repaired or replaced. The airbag system  
does not need regular maintenance.  
In hilly or mountainous terrain.  
When doing frequent trailer towing.  
Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery  
service.  
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This  
service can be complex; you should have  
your retailer perform this service. See Engine  
Coolant on page 331 for what to use. Inspect  
hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,  
and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling  
system and pressure cap.  
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges  
and latches, hood hinges and latches, glove box  
hinges, sunroof (if equipped), and any folding  
seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may be  
426  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate  
a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired  
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.  
Owner Checks and Services  
These owner checks and services should be  
performed at the intervals specified to help ensure  
the safety, dependability, and emission control  
performance of your vehicle. Your Saturn retailer  
can assist you with these checks and services.  
(k) Or every 12 months, whichever occurs first.  
If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,  
the filter may require replacement more often.  
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,  
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.  
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed  
at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants  
are added to your vehicle, make sure they are  
the proper ones, as shown in Recommended  
Fluids and Lubricants on page 432.  
(m) Change the fluid the first time the vehicle  
is serviced after 100,000 miles (166 000 km)  
and when the vehicle is serviced after each  
subsequent 50,000 miles (83 000 km).  
(n) Severe service is when the vehicle is mainly  
driven under one or more of these conditions:  
In very high temperatures — over  
110°F (43°C).  
In very low temperatures — under  
-20°F (-29°C).  
When doing frequent trailer towing.  
(p) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive  
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if  
necessary.  
427  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
At Each Fuel Fill  
At Least Once a Month  
It is important to perform these underhood checks  
at each fuel fill.  
Tire Inflation Check  
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they  
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget  
to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire  
Pressure on page 374. Check to make sure the  
spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat  
Tire on page 386.  
Engine Oil Level Check  
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil  
if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 318 for  
further details.  
Notice: It is important to check the engine  
oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.  
Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper level  
can cause damage to the engine not covered  
by your warranty.  
Tire Wear Inspection  
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage  
highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System  
service notification. Check the tires for wear  
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire  
Engine Coolant Level Check  
Check the engine coolant level and add  
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See  
Engine Coolant on page 331 for further details.  
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check  
Check the windshield washer fluid level in  
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add  
the proper fluid if necessary.  
428  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start  
the engine in each gear. The vehicle should  
start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the  
vehicle starts in any other position, contact  
your Saturn retailer for service.  
At Least Once a Year  
Starter Switch Check  
{CAUTION:  
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift  
lever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal  
down halfway, and try to start the engine.  
The vehicle should start only when the clutch  
pedal is pushed down all the way to the floor.  
If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal is not  
pushed all the way down, contact your Saturn  
retailer for service.  
When you are doing this inspection,  
the vehicle could move suddenly. If the  
vehicle moves, you or others could be  
injured.  
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough  
room around the vehicle.  
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and  
the regular brake. See Parking Brake on  
page 119.  
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be  
ready to turn off the engine immediately  
if it starts.  
429  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,  
but do not start the engine. Without applying  
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out  
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever  
moves out of PARK (P), contact your Saturn  
retailer for service.  
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control  
System Check  
{CAUTION:  
When you are doing this inspection,  
the vehicle could move suddenly. If the  
vehicle moves, you or others could be  
injured.  
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check  
While parked, and with the parking brake set,  
try to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever  
position.  
With an automatic transaxle, the ignition  
should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever  
is in PARK (P). The ignition key should  
come out only in LOCK.  
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough  
room around the vehicle. It should be parked  
on a level surface.  
With a manual transaxle, the ignition key  
should come out only in LOCK.  
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking  
Brake on page 119.  
Be ready to apply the regular brake  
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.  
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.  
430  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing  
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,  
set the parking brake.  
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle  
Park (P) Mechanism Check  
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:  
With the engine running and transaxle in  
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure  
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the  
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.  
{CAUTION:  
When you are doing this check, your  
vehicle could begin to move. You or  
others could be injured and property  
could be damaged. Make sure there is  
room in front of your vehicle in case it  
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the  
regular brake at once should the vehicle  
begin to move.  
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding  
ability: With the engine running, shift to  
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake  
followed by the regular brake.  
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.  
Underbody Flushing Service  
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any  
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care  
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other  
debris can collect.  
431  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recommended Fluids and  
Lubricants  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable  
water and use only DEX-COOL®  
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on  
page 331.  
Engine Coolant  
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,  
part number, or specification can be obtained from  
your retailer.  
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or  
System  
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Windshield  
Washer  
Optikleen® Washer Solvent  
Engine oil which meets GM  
Standard GM6094M and displays  
the American Petroleum Institute  
Certified for Gasoline Engines  
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®  
oil meets all the requirements for  
your vehicle. To determine the  
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s  
engine, see Engine Oil on page 318.  
Chassis Lubricant  
(GM Part No. 12377985,  
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant  
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
Engine Oil  
(2.2L L4  
engine)  
Parking Brake  
Cable Guides  
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid  
or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid  
(Saturn Part No. 21013073).  
Hydraulic  
Clutch System  
Engine oil which displays the  
American Petroleum Institute  
Manual Transmission Fluid  
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,  
in Canada 88861801).  
Certified for Gasoline Engines  
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®  
oil meets all the requirements for  
your vehicle. To determine the  
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s  
engine, see Engine Oil on page 318.  
Manual  
Transaxle  
Engine Oil  
(3.5L V6  
engine)  
Automatic  
Transaxle (with  
2.2L L4 engine)  
DEXRON®-VI Automatic  
Transmission Fluid.  
432  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Usage  
Fluid/Lubricant  
Automatic  
Hood Latch  
Assembly,  
ATF Z1 Automatic Transmission  
Fluid (Saturn Part No. 22717466).  
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol  
(Saturn Part No. 21038869 or  
GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,  
in Canada 992723) or lubricant  
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
Transaxle (with  
3.5L V6 engine)  
Secondary  
Latch,  
Rear Drive  
Module and  
Power Transfer  
Unit (except  
with 3.5L V6  
engine)  
Pivots, Spring  
Anchor, and  
Release Pawl  
VERSATRAK® Fluid  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378514,  
in Canada 88901045).  
Hood, Liftgate  
Door, and Rear  
Folding Seat  
Hinges  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,  
in Canada 10953474).  
Rear Drive  
VERSATRAK® Fluid  
Module (with (GM Part No. U.S. 12378514,  
3.5L V6 engine) in Canada 88901045).  
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol  
(Saturn Part No. 21038869 or  
GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,  
in Canada 992723) or lubricant  
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,  
Category LB or GC-LB.  
Transfer Case Synthetic Axle Lubricant  
Sunroof Track  
(with 3.5L V6 (GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,  
engine)  
in Canada 10953455).  
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,  
in Canada 10953474).  
Key Lock  
Cylinders  
Weatherstrip Lubricant  
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,  
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or  
Conditioning  
Dielectric Silicone Grease  
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,  
in Canada 992887).  
433  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts  
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your  
retailer.  
Part  
Saturn Part Number  
ACDelco® Part Number  
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter  
Engine Oil Filter  
2.2L L4  
22676970  
A1627C  
12605566  
12582255  
15822812  
PF457G  
3.5L V6  
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element  
Spark Plugs  
2.2L L4  
12607280  
12582002  
41-105  
3.5L V6  
Wiper Blades  
Driver’s Side – 24 inches (60.0 cm)  
Passenger’s Side – 19 inches (47.5 cm)  
Rear – 11.0 inches (28.0 cm)  
22703508  
22703507  
22665007  
434  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engine Drive Belt Routing  
If your vehicle has a hybrid engine, see “Engine  
Drive Belt Routing” in the Saturn Vue Hybrid  
Owners Manual.  
3.5L V6 (L66) Engine  
2.2L L4 (L61) Engine  
435  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Record  
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the  
service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements  
on page 418. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 427 can be added  
on the following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.  
Maintenance Record  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
436  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
437  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance Record (cont’d)  
Odometer  
Reading  
Maintenance I or  
Maintenance II  
Date  
Serviced By  
Services Performed  
438  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STEP TWO: Should you need additional  
assistance, in the U.S., contact the Saturn  
Customer Assistance Center by calling  
1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact the  
Saturn Customer Communication Centre at  
1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance  
Center team member will handle your call  
and assist in providing product and warranty  
information, the nearest retailer location, roadside  
assistance, brochures, literature and discuss any  
concerns you may have.  
Customer Assistance and  
Information  
Customer Satisfaction Procedure  
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important  
to your retailer and to Saturn. Together we  
are committed to providing our customers with  
unparalleled service, before, during, and after the  
purchase of a Saturn vehicle, for total customer  
satisfaction. We call this the Saturn Difference.  
Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction  
or the operation of your vehicle are resolved by  
your retailer’s sales or service departments. If,  
for any reason, your ownership experience  
falls below your expectations, we suggest  
you take the following action:  
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in  
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please  
have the following information available to give the  
Customer Assistance Representative:  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This  
17-digit number can be found on the vehicle  
registration or title, on the upper driver side  
corner of the dash, or on your roadside  
assistance key card.  
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer  
Assistance Liaison. Any member of the retail  
management team has the authority and the  
desire to resolve your concerns. Normally,  
concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.  
The name of your selling and servicing retail  
facility.  
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.  
Your daytime and evening phone numbers.  
440  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When contacting Saturn, please remember that  
your concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s  
facility. That is why we suggest you follow  
Step One first if you have a concern.  
Although you may be required to resort to this  
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a  
court action, use of the program is free of charge  
and your case is generally heard within 40 days.  
If you do not agree with the decision given in your  
case, you can reject it and proceed with any other  
venue for relief available to you.  
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and  
its retailers are committed to making sure you  
are completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle.  
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied  
after following the procedure outlined in Steps One  
and Two, Saturn and its retailers offer the  
additional assistance of a neutral party through  
our voluntary participation in a mediation/arbitration  
program called Better Business Bureau (BBB)  
Auto Line.  
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using the  
toll-free telephone number or by writing them at  
the following address:  
BBB Auto Line Program  
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.  
4200 Wilson Boulevard  
Suite 800  
Arlington, VA 22203-1838  
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court  
program administered by the Council of Better  
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes  
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation  
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This program  
is available at no cost to you, our customer.  
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100  
This program is available in all 50 states and  
the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by  
vehicle age, mileage and other factors. Saturn  
Corporation reserves the right to change eligibility  
limitations and/or discontinue its participation in  
this program.  
441  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):  
For further information concerning eligibility  
in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration  
Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.  
Alternatively, you may call the Saturn Customer  
Communication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or  
you may write to:  
General Motors Participation in the  
Mediation/Arbitration Program  
In the event that you do not feel your  
concerns have been addressed after following  
the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,  
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed  
to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving  
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program  
provides for the review of the facts involved by  
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an  
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program  
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement  
process, from the time you file your complaint  
to the final decision, should be completed  
in approximately 70 days. We believe our  
impartial program offers advantages over  
courts in most jurisdictions because it is  
Mediation/Arbitration Program  
c/o Customer Communication Centre  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
Mail Code: CA1-163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100  
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).  
informal, quick, and free of charge.  
442  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
My GM Canada (Canada only)  
Online Owner Center  
My GM Canada is a password-protected section  
of gmcanada.com where you can save information  
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and  
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.  
Online Owner Center  
(United States only)  
The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturn  
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can  
be found in one place.  
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services  
you will have access to:  
The Online Owner Center allows you to:  
− My Showroom: Find and save information on  
vehicles and current offers in your area.  
Get e-mail service reminders.  
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as  
address and phone number for each of  
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.  
Access information about your specific  
vehicle, including tips and videos and  
an electronic version of this owner manual.  
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and  
helpful advice on owning and maintaining  
your vehicle.  
Keep track of your vehicle’s service history  
and maintenance schedule.  
Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.  
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,  
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms  
with greater ease.  
Receive special promotions and privileges only  
available to members.  
Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated  
information and to register your vehicle.  
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM  
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.  
443  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1-800-553-6000  
Customer Assistance for Text  
Telephone (TTY) Users  
1-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephone  
devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000  
To assist owners who have hearing  
difficulties, Saturn has installed special TDD  
(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)  
equipment in its Saturn Customer Assistance  
Center.  
In Canada, write to:  
Saturn Customer Communication Centre  
General Motors of Canada Ltd.  
CA1-163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer  
who has access to a TDD or to a conventional  
Text Telephone (TTY) can communicate with  
Saturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users  
in Canada may dial 1-800-263-3830.  
www.gmcanada.com  
1-800-263-1999  
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone  
devices (TTYs))  
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800  
Customer Assistance Offices  
Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free  
number for assistance. If a customer wishes to write  
to Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:  
Saturn Customer Assistance Center  
100 Saturn Parkway  
Mail Code 371-999-S24  
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500  
444  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Canada, customers may call the  
Saturn Customer Communication Centre  
at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in Canada  
may call 1-800-263-3830.  
GM Mobility Reimbursement  
Program  
Roadside Assistance Program  
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call  
1-800-553-6000 (TTY: 1-800-833-6000).  
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call  
1-800-268-6800.  
This program, available to qualified applicants,  
can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible  
aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive  
Service is available 24 hours a day,  
365 days a year.  
equipment you may require for your vehicle such  
as hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.  
As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are  
automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside  
Assistance Program.  
The offer is available for a limited period of time  
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.  
Who is Covered?  
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s  
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn  
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000.  
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.  
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle  
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,  
a person driving this vehicle without the consent  
of the owner is not eligible for coverage.  
445  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following services are provided in the U.S.  
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and  
in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage  
period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to  
a maximum coverage of $100.  
Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in  
good condition, when equipped and properly  
inflated is covered at no charge. The customer  
is responsible for the repair or replacement of  
the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.  
Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the  
vehicle to get to the nearest service station  
(approximately $5 Canada). Service to provide  
diesel may be restricted. For safety reasons,  
propane and other alternative fuels are  
not provided through this service.  
Jump Start: No-start occurrences which  
require a battery jump start are covered at no  
charge.  
Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon  
request, Roadside Assistance will send you  
detailed, computer personalized maps,  
highlighting your choice of either the most  
direct route or the most scenic route to your  
destination, anywhere in North America, along  
with helpful travel information pertaining to  
your trip.  
Lock-out Service: To ensure security, the  
driver must present personal identification  
before lock-out service is provided. In Canada,  
the vehicle registration is also required.  
Lock-out service is covered at no charge if  
you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.  
A remote unlock may be available if you have  
an active OnStar® subscription.  
We make every attempt to send your  
personalized trip routing as quickly as possible,  
but it is best to allow three weeks before your  
planned departure date. Trip routing requests  
are limited to six per calendar year.  
Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway  
or Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn  
retailer for warranty service or in the event  
of a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out  
assistance provided when the vehicle is mired  
in sand, mud, or snow.  
446  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
road service, and you will be reimbursed up to  
$100 upon submission of the original receipt to  
Roadside Assistance.  
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance  
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty  
related vehicle disablement, while en route and  
over 250 kilometres from the original point of  
departure, you might qualify for trip interruption  
expense assistance. This assistance covers  
reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum  
of $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of  
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),  
and (C) alternate ground transportation  
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist  
you with some of the unplanned expense you  
may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be  
repaired.  
In many instances, mechanical failures are  
covered under Saturn’s Bumper-to-Bumper  
warranty for U.S. customers, and the duration  
of the Base Warranty Coverage for Canadian  
customers of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.  
However, any cost for parts and labor for  
non-warranty repairs are the responsibility  
of the driver.  
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,  
please provide the following to the Roadside  
Assistance Representatives:  
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,  
and a copy of the repair order are required.  
Your name, home address, and home  
telephone number  
Once authorization has been given, your  
advisor will help you make any necessary  
arrangements and explain how to claim for  
trip interruption expense assistance.  
Telephone number of your location  
Location of the vehicle  
Model, year, color, and license plate number  
Alternative Service (Canada only): There  
could be times when Roadside Assistance  
cannot provide timely assistance. Your advisor  
may authorize you to secure local emergency  
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification  
Number (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle  
Description of the problem  
447  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While we hope you never have the occasion to  
use our service, it is added security while traveling  
for you and your family. Remember we are only  
a phone call away. Saturn Roadside Assistance:  
1-800-553-6000 ; text telephone (TTY) users,  
call 1-800-833-6000. Canadian customers  
call 1-800-268-6800.  
Towing and Road Service Exclusions  
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance  
coverage are towing or services for vehicles  
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,  
fines, impound towing caused by a violation  
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federal  
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing  
of snow tires, chains or other traction devices.  
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited  
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement  
to an owner or driver when, in their sole  
discretion, the claims become excessive  
in frequency or type of occurrence.  
Collision Damage Repair  
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is  
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified  
technician using the proper equipment and  
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed  
collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s resale  
value, and safety performance can be  
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in  
the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited  
Warranty. Saturn and General Motors of Canada  
Limited reserve the right to make any changes  
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program  
at any time without notification.  
compromised in subsequent collisions.  
448  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.  
These are made by companies other than GM  
and may not have been tested for your vehicle.  
As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit  
premature durability/corrosion problems, and may  
not perform properly in subsequent collisions.  
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM  
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle  
failure related to such parts are not covered by  
that warranty.  
Collision Parts  
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made  
with the same materials and construction methods  
as the parts with which your vehicle was originally  
built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best  
choice to assure that your vehicle’s designed  
appearance, durability, and safety are preserved.  
The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain  
your GM New Vehicle Warranty.  
Recycled original equipment parts may also  
be used for repair. These parts are typically  
removed from vehicles that were total losses in  
prior accidents. In most cases, the parts being  
recycled are from undamaged sections of the  
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,  
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your  
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety  
performance, however, the history of these parts is  
not known. Such parts are not covered by your GM  
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related  
failures are not covered by that warranty.  
Repair Facility  
GM also recommends that you choose a collision  
repair facility that meets your needs before you  
ever need collision repairs. Your Saturn retailer  
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained  
technicians and state of the art equipment, or  
be able to recommend a collision repair center  
that has GM-trained technicians and comparable  
equipment.  
449  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Insuring Your Vehicle  
If an Accident Occurs  
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with  
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.  
There are significant differences in the quality of  
coverage afforded by various insurance policy  
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced  
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting  
Here is what to do if you are involved in an  
accident.  
Try to relax and then check to make sure  
you are all right. If you are uninjured,  
make sure that no one else in your vehicle,  
or the other vehicle, is injured.  
compensation for damage repairs by using  
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance  
companies will not specify aftermarket collision  
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend  
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with  
GM original equipment collision parts. If such  
insurance coverage is not available from your  
current insurance carrier, consider switching to  
another insurance carrier.  
If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.  
Do not leave the scene of an accident until  
all matters have been taken care of. Move  
your vehicle only if its position puts you  
in danger or you are instructed to move it  
by a police officer.  
Give only the necessary and requested  
information to police and other parties involved  
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal  
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything  
unrelated to the accident. This helps guard  
against post-accident legal action.  
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company  
may require you to have insurance that assures  
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment  
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine  
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your  
lease carefully, as you may be charged at  
the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.  
If you need roadside assistance, call GM  
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside  
Assistance Program on page 445 for more  
information.  
450  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is  
especially true if there are no injuries and both  
vehicles are driveable.  
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where  
the towing service is taking it. Get a card  
from the tow truck operator or write down the  
driver’s name, the service’s name, and the  
phone number.  
Remove any valuables from your vehicle  
before it is towed away. Make sure this  
includes your insurance information and  
registration if you keep these items in your  
vehicle.  
Gather the important information you need  
from the other driver. Things like name,  
address, phone number, driver’s license  
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,  
model and model year, Vehicle Identification  
Number (VIN), insurance company and  
policy number, and a general description  
of the damage to the other vehicle.  
If possible, call your insurance company from  
the scene of the accident. They will walk you  
through the information they need. If they ask  
for a police report, phone or go to the police  
department headquarters the next day and you  
can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In  
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance  
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for  
your vehicle. Whether you select a Saturn  
retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix  
the damage, make sure you are comfortable  
with them. Remember, you will have to feel  
comfortable with their work for a long time.  
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully  
and make sure you understand what work will  
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a  
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable  
shops welcome this opportunity.  
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair  
Process  
In the event that your vehicle requires damage  
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active  
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined  
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,  
or have it towed there. Specify to the facility  
that any required replacement collision parts  
be original equipment parts, either new Genuine  
GM parts or recycled original GM parts.  
Remember, recycled parts are not covered by  
your GM vehicle warranty.  
451  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must  
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,  
your insurance company may initially value the  
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with  
your repair professional, and insist on Genuine  
GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you  
may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with  
Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage  
does not pay the full cost.  
Reporting Safety Defects  
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
United States Government  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which  
could cause a crash or could cause injury or  
death, you should immediately inform the National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),  
in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.  
If another party’s insurance company is paying for  
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair  
valuation based on that insurance company’s  
collision policy repair limits, as you have no  
contractual limits with that company. In such cases,  
you can have control of the repair and parts choices  
as long as cost stays within reasonable limits.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it could  
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety  
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it could  
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,  
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual  
problems between you, your retailer or Saturn  
Corporation.  
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline  
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);  
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:  
Administrator, NHTSA  
400 Seventh Street, SW.  
Washington, D.C. 20590  
You can also obtain other information about motor  
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.  
452  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-1999.  
Or, write to:  
Reporting Safety Defects to the  
Canadian Government  
Saturn Customer Communication Centre  
General Motors of Canada Limited  
CA1-163-005  
1908 Colonel Sam Drive  
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7  
If you live in Canada, and you believe that  
your vehicle has a safety defect, you should  
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition  
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.  
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:  
Service Publications Ordering  
Information  
Transport Canada  
Road Safety Branch  
2780 Sheffield Road  
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9  
Service Manuals  
A variety of publications are available to you.  
Saturn service manuals are written for trained  
technicians, and in some cases, specialized tools  
and equipment are necessary to complete certain  
repairs. However, the manuals are available to  
owners who either have the training, or wish to gain  
a greater understanding of the technical aspect of  
their Saturn.  
For additional publications information or  
to order publications in the United States,  
call toll free 1-800-2-SATURN or visit  
www.saturn-publications.com to order on-line.  
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available  
by calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.  
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn  
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport  
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope  
you will notify us.  
U.S. customers can call the Saturn Customer  
Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000, or write:  
Saturn Corporation  
100 Saturn Parkway  
Mail Drop 371-999-S24  
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500  
453  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain  
to the proper use and care of your vehicle.  
Some describe costly repairs. Others describe  
inexpensive repairs which, if done on time with  
the latest parts, may avoid future costly repairs.  
Owner Publications  
Information on how to obtain product bulletins  
and as described below is applicable only in the  
fifty U.S. states and the District of Columbia,  
and only for cars and light trucks with a Gross  
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) less than  
10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of individual  
bulletins are also at your participating Saturn  
retailer. You can ask to see them.  
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair  
a new or unexpected condition. Others describe  
a quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can help a  
technician service your vehicle better.  
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a  
small number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer  
or a qualified technician may have to determine  
if a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle.  
To order Saturn bulletins, call Saturn  
Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit  
www.saturn-publications.com to order online.  
In Canada, information relating to product service  
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your  
Saturn retailer.  
Service Bulletins  
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service  
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors  
product performance in the field. We then  
prepare bulletins for servicing our products  
better. You can get these bulletins, too.  
454  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Event Data Recorders  
Vehicle Data Recording and  
Privacy  
Some information about your vehicle’s performance  
and how it is driven may be recorded on various  
modules if a crash occurs. Some people refer to  
these modules as event data recorders (EDRs).  
These modules may record several seconds of  
pre-crash and crash data, such as data related  
to engine speed, brake application, throttle  
position, vehicle speed, yaw rate, steering  
wheel angle, lateral acceleration, safety belt  
usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance  
and the severity of the collision. Unlike the flight  
data recorders on airplanes, these modules do not  
record sounds or conversations.  
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated  
computers that record information about the  
vehicle’s performance and how it is driven.  
For example, your vehicle uses computer modules  
to monitor and control engine and transmission  
performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag  
deployment and deploy airbags in a crash and,  
if so equipped, to provide anti-lock braking to help  
the driver control the vehicle. These modules may  
store data to help your dealer/retailer technician  
service your vehicle. Some modules may also store  
data about how you operate the vehicle, such as  
rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These  
modules may also retain the owner’s personal  
preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat positions,  
and temperature settings.  
To retrieve this data, special equipment and  
access to the vehicle or the module that stores  
the data are required. Certain data may also be  
sent to or retrieved by OnStar® (see below).  
GM will not access this information or share it with  
others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner  
or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the  
lessee; in response to an official request of police or  
455  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
similar government office; as part of GM’s defense  
of litigation through the discovery process; or, as  
required by law. Data that GM collects or receives  
may also be used for GM research needs or may be  
made available to others for research purposes,  
where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a  
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.  
Navigation System  
If your vehicle has a navigation system,  
use of the system may result in the storage of  
destinations, addresses, telephone numbers,  
and other trip information. Please refer to  
the navigation system operating manual for  
information on stored data and for deletion  
instructions.  
Others may be able to retrieve this data if they  
have access to the vehicle and have the special  
equipment necessary to download the data.  
Radio Frequency  
Identification (RFID)  
OnStar  
If your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribe  
to the OnStar® services, please refer to the  
OnStar® Terms and Conditions for information  
on data collection and use. See also OnStar®  
System on page 128 for more information.  
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for  
functions such as tire pressure monitoring  
and ignition system security, as well as in  
connection with conveniences such as key fobs  
for remote door locking/unlocking and starting,  
and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door  
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles  
does not use or record personal information  
or link with any other GM system containing  
personal information.  
456  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
457  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Audio System (cont.)  
458  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning (cont.)  
459  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
460  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine (cont.)  
E
461  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Front Console Storage Area ........................ 132  
462  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
463  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Light (cont.)  
464  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 128  
465  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Passlock® .................................................... 108  
466  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
467  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Passlock® ................................................ 108  
468  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
469  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle (cont.)  
470  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

PYLE Audio Speaker System PCMX265W User Guide
Rangemaster Cooktop RC60 User Guide
RCA DVD Player DRC8005N User Guide
RCA Flat Panel Television RLED4778A User Guide
Renesas Computer Hardware SH2 7137 User Guide
Ricoh Copier 1055 User Guide
Roberts Radio Portable Radio R9921 User Guide
Samsung Car Video System 2063UW User Guide
Samsung Cell Phone T301G User Guide
Sangean Electronics MP3 Player SR 3 User Guide